Home

LogWare II Real-Time Data Acquisition Software User's Guide

Contents

1. m When should this event occur Only once when the alarm value is exceeded Cancel After every update Help Figure 14 Alarm Settings dialog 27 User s Guide 28 The Low alarm tab and High alarm tab indicate the current low alarm and high alarm settings for the selected channel respectively To enable an alarm for the selected channel check the Enable alarm check box on the appropriate tab If this check box is unchecked all other settings on the tab are disabled Enter the value to be used for this alarm in the Value box The low alarm will be tripped if the reading on the selected channel meets or drops below the value on the Low alarm tab The high alarm will be tripped if the reading on the se lected channel meets or exceeds the value on the High alarm tab Select the event that should occur when each alarm is tripped The choices are e No event e System beep e Display message e Play WAV file indicated below e Launch EXE file indicated below If either the Play WAV file indicated below or Launch EXE file indicated be low option is selected the Path and filename box and Browse button are en abled and the appropriate file must be entered or selected Use the Browse button to browse for the file The Test button is enabled once a file has been en tered Select the Test button to make sure the selected file can be played or launched Note The file entered in the Path and filen
2. 206 6 4 Opening a configuration file automatically on start up 207 6 5 Changing thermometer and probe settings 209 6 6 Importing logged data into a spreadsheet 210 6 7 Synchronizing the thermometer readout s clock to the computer 214 6 8 Protecting calibration parameters and probe conversion settings 215 6 9 Setting up an administrator passcode 216 6 10 Viewing remaining memory for logging data 218 6 11 Downloading logged data from the memory of a thermometer readout 218 6 12 Saving probe coefficients to a configuration file 219 6 13 Using an IR dongle with LogWare o o o 220 6 14 Changing logging label names o o 221 6 15 Unlocking a demo version of LogWare 222 6 16 Setting up LogWare to read multiple scales 223 T Files pesee sem aaaea a e A ee Cer 7 1 Configuration files o ooo o 227 vi 7 2 7 1 1 Log session configuration file ss re seia nira ooo ee ee 227 TAQ Alarm configuration file o ooo eee 228 7 1 3 Conversion configuration files o a a a e e 228 Datafilese mor oameni ta oe ko ts bE pl ia 229 7 2 1 Output tile gt notaras Big a e ae wear dia at da 229 1 2 2 Download files s s ie he a e e cd AY e ld 8 231 7 2 3 Alami Log File Voir a e a a ad eS 231 8 Download procesS 233 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 1523 1524 Handh
3. 4 4 6 5 The Scan Channels list shows all available channels in 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer readout If Scan Enable is Off a check next to a channel indicates the measurement channel Click the checkbox next to a channel to change the measurement channel If Scan Enable is On a check next to a chan nel indicates the channel is part of the instrument s scan sequence Click the checkbox next to a channel to change the scan sequence Channel Setup tab Select the Channel Setup tab to view a list of channels on the 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer readout and to access the channel and probe settings for each channel Filtering Display Timing Scanning Channel Setup Channels Probe Settings Channel 2 Ch 13 Channel 4 Channel Settings Figure 133 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Channel setup tab The Channels list shows all available channels in 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer readout Select a channel to view or modify the channel or probe settings Click the Probe Settings button to display the appropriate probe settings for the selected channel When this button is clicked the probe settings are read in from the thermometer readout Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate channel settings for the selected channel When this button is clicked the channel settings are read in from the thermometer readout 165 User s Guide 166 4 4 6 6 1594A 1595A Hart Supe
4. o 2568 RTDS Module Settings General tab 2568 RTDS Module Settings Channels tab 2568 RTDS Module Settings Calibration tab 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings dialog 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings Probe tab 1560 Black Stack Thermocouple Channel Settings dialog 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings Probe tab 1575A Super Thermometer Settings dialog 1575A Super Thermometer Settings Filtering tab 1575A Super Thermometer Settings Sampling tab 1575A Super Thermometer Settings Measurement tab 1575A Super Thermometer Settings Channels tab 1575A Super Thermometer Settings Calibration tab 1575A Super Thermometer 2575 Mighty Mux Channel Settings dialog lt lt rr Sus a be Pee as 1575A Super Thermometer 2575 Mighty Mux Channel Settings Probe tabs o eee 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings dialog 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings Filtering tab 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings Sampling tab 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings Measurement tab 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings Channels tab 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings Calibration tab 1590 Super Thermometer 11 2590 Mighty Mux II Channel Settings dialog os ecte be ON oa Gee td de 146
5. 1 Introduction Using LogWare 1 7 1 Log Ware main display The main display consists of the menus toolbar a workspace area and a status bar 559935 LogWare II loj x Fie Datalog Download View Graph Tools Window Help OSO gt HO BRA Ose F Ready 12 31 2001 41 AM oy Figure 1 9935 LogWare II Main Display The menus allow access to the various features of the software A general de scription of the options in each menu is given below These menus are de scribed in more detail in Section 5 Menus File Open and save configuration files print options and exit the soft ware Datalog Setup Start Stop and Close real time log sessions Download Download logged readings and view log status View View alarm log reading history and open previously logged data files Graph Change graph settings zoom in and out and print the current graph Tools Synchronize thermometer readout date time access logging la bels configure thermometer readout and probe settings change LogWare options Window Rearrange and switch between open windows Help Display help topics and About dialog User s Guide 10 The toolbar allows quick access to the most common menu functions The toolbar is divided into sections that correspond to related functions Toolbar sections may be rearranged as desired by clicking on the vertical bar on the left side of the section and dragging it to the desired loca
6. 182 graph and is generally used to denote the scale of the X axis By default this ti tle is set to Time Enter the title for the left Y axis of the graph in the Left Title box The left title can contain up to 80 characters This title appears centered vertically on the left side of the graph and is generally used to denote the scale of the Y axis The ti tle can be displayed horizontally or vertically running up or down By default this title is set to the Readings Scale with the Up orientation option selected Enter the title for the right Y axis of the graph in the Right Title box The right title can contain up to 80 characters This title appears centered vertically on the right side of the graph and is generally used to denote the scale of a second ary Y axis The title can be displayed horizontally or vertically running up or down By default the right title is blank Note Log Ware only supports on Y axis on the left side of the graph However a title can still be placed on the right side of the graph 5 Menus Graph menu 5 5 1 2 Axis tab The Axis tab can be used to customize the graph s X and Y axis settings col ors ticks and gridlines Titles Axis Fonts Trends Background Legend Apply to Axis 7 Color of Axes T Position Scale gt y Range Variable C Zero Origin May fi 001 Left Variable Origin Mir fo 001 C Right C User Defined Ticks j r Tick Marks Grids
7. Log session configuration files must always have an extension of rls and can be saved and opened from any of the following locations e Open and Save As buttons on the Log Session Settings dialog e Open and Save As options in the File menu e Open and Save As buttons on the toolbar Note Opening a log session configuration file overwrites ALL current log session settings 227 User s Guide 228 7 1 2 7 1 3 For more information on opening and saving real time log session files see Section 2 Real Time Logging Alarm configuration file The alarm configuration file is used to save the current alarm settings of a sin gle channel Warning Do not attempt to manually modify the contents of any configu ration file Files that have been modified may not be able to be read by Log Ware An alarm configuration file contains configuration information for low and high alarms on a single channel This information includes the alarm state en abled or disabled alarm values events and other options Alarm configuration files must always have an extension of alm and can be saved and opened from the Alarm Settings dialog Note Opening an alarm configuration file overwrites the current alarm settings Conversion configuration files Conversion configuration files are useful for saving probe coefficients to a file Conversion configuration files contain information concerning a single conver sion type including coeff
8. Mute all alarms The Mute All Alarms option can be used to mute any audible alarms associated with the current real time log session When the alarms are muted a check mark appears next to this option Muting the alarms does not prevent alarm events from happening The uf button on the toolbar corresponds to the Mute All Alarms option When alarms are muted the toolbar button appears as ct 5 Menus Download menu 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 2 Download menu The Download menu contains options for downloading logged data from the thermometer readout s memory or logs and viewing the current status of the thermometer readout s logs or memory Download Logged Data Log Status Figure 139 Download Menu Download logged data The Download Logged Data option can be used to download data that has been logged to the thermometer readout s logs or memory All thermometer readouts supported by LogWare support logging of some type Please refer to Section 1 4 4 Firmware Requirements for more information When selecting the Download Logged Data option the Select Model dialog is displayed LogWare needs to know the model of the thermometer readout in or der to display appropriate options dialog Please refer to Section 3 2 Select Model Dialog for more details on the Select Model dialog After the thermometer readout model and communication settings have been selected the appropriate Download Options dialog for the selected the
9. Figure 152 LogWare Options Tools tab The Allow editing instrument serial numbers option determines whether LogWare will allow the serial number of the thermometer readouts to be changed using the Thermometer Settings option in the Tools menu If this op tion is checked the Serial number boxes on the thermometer settings dialogs are enabled where applicable and the serial number of the thermometer read out can be changed Note Many Hart Scientific thermometer readouts save the thermometer readout s serial number in its memory However many thermometer read outs still have their serial number set to 0 This option can be used to al low the thermometer readout s serial number to be set Once the serial number is set this option should always be left off to prevent the serial number from being changed to an incorrect setting Note This option is protected by the administrator passcode To change this setting the correct administrator passcode must be entered For more information see Section 5 6 4 4 Admin Passcode Tab The Read thermometer settings after applying changes option determines whether Log Ware will query the thermometer readout for current settings after new settings have been applied This option is used on the thermometer settings dialogs which are accessible from the Thermometer Settings option 198 5 Menus Tools menu 5 6 4 4 The Protect probe conversion settings option determines whether probe con
10. Inputs 1 to 6 Inputs 7 to 12 Figure 98 2566 TCS Module Settings Inputs 1 to 6 tab Enter the values for the calibration constants for inputs to 6 in the boxes pro vided The calibration constants required by the 2566 module are OS 1 GA 1 CJ OS 1 CJ OS 2 CJ OS 3 CJ OS 4 CJ OS 5 and CJ OS 6 The values of these constants should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module 125 User s Guide 126 4 4 3 11 2 2 4 4 3 12 Inputs 7 to 12 tab Select the Inputs 7 to 12 tab to view and or modify the calibration constants for inputs channels 7 to 12 rear row of this module Inputs 1 to 6 Inputs 7 to 12 Figure 99 2566 TCS Module Settings Inputs 7 to 12 tab Enter the values for the calibration constants for inputs 7 to 12 in the boxes pro vided The calibration constants required by the 2566 module are OS 2 GA 2 CJ OS 7 CJ OS 8 CJ OS 9 CJ OS 10 CJ OS 11 and CJ OS 12 The values of these constants should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module 2567 RTD Module Settings dialog The 2567 Module Settings dialog displays information about the 2567 module including model number serial number identification information and the 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs number of channels on this module It also allows many module specific set tings to be viewed and or modified 2567 Module Settings E m 2567 Module Settings Model Serial Identificatio
11. To clear all readings from the demand log click the Clear Demand Log button The Auto log progress bar indicates the current state of the auto log The auto log in the 1524 Handheld Thermometer readout holds up to 15 000 readings To clear all readings from the auto log click the Clear Auto Log button To refresh the log status information on this dialog click the Refresh button The log status is read in from the thermometer readout again and the dialog is updated To close this dialog click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 61 User s Guide 62 3 4 3 3 4 4 1529 Chub E4 log status dialog The Model 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout including models 1529 1529 R and 1529 T can store readings in any of two logs demand log and auto log Log Ware can display the current status of these logs and provides a way to clear all readings from these logs When the Log Status option in the Download menu is selected and the 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout is se lected on the Select Model dialog the 1529 Chub E4 Log Status dialog is dis played 1529 Chub E4 Log Status Refresh Demand log 48 48 full iL Clear Demand Log Auto log 23 08 full 6 6hmt lt OS Clear Auto Log Help Figure 37 1529 Chub E4 Log Status dialog The Demand log progress bar indicates the current status of the demand log The demand log
12. To print a file check the Send file s directly to default printer when dou ble clicked option Double clicking an entry in the list will then cause the file to be sent to the current default printer Click the OK button to close this dialog 1590 Super Thermometer II download process The download process for the 1590 Super Thermometer II readout consists of 3 main steps 1 Download the data from the thermometer readout 2 Parse the data 3 Write the data to download file When the download process starts a progress dialog appears to indicate the download progress To abort downloading the data from the thermometer read out click the Cancel button on the progress dialog If the Prompt to enter filename option was selected the Windows Save As di alog is displayed to get the name of the file that the data should be saved to once the data has been downloaded The Download folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for download files on the Log Ware Options dialog Accept the default filename or enter new filename and click the Save button to continue If a file with the selected filename already exists confirm overwriting the existing file or enter a new filename Clicking the Can cel button on the Windows Save As dialog aborts the download process If the Prompt to enter filename option was not selected the data is saved to a file with the default filename download txt 8 Download proces
13. fi 246464456 04 B 4 5 245645646 05 Cancel Help Figure 170 ITS 90 Settings dialog If the ITS 90 coefficients were read in from the thermometer readout the boxes are filled with the current coefficient values Enter the RTPW coefficient in from the Report of Calibration in the RTPW box This box must contain a valid value Select the Low Range tab to select the low range and enter low range coeffi cients Select the High Range tab to select the high range and enter high range coefficients 239 User s Guide 240 9 1 1 9 1 2 Select the Open button to display the Windows Open dialog to open a previ ously saved configuration file which contains ITS 90 coefficients Select the Save As button to display the Windows Save As dialog to save the current ITS 90 coefficients to a configuration file Click the OK button to accept the current coefficients and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog Low Range tab Select the Low Range tab to select the low range and enter low range coeffi cients If the thermometer readout being used does not support ITS 90 low ranges this tab is not displayed Low Range l High Range Select low range to use Range 4 83K to 273K y A 4 fi 246464 456 04 B 4 5 245645646E 05 Figure 171 ITS 90 Se
14. 234 Figure 170 ITS 90 Settings dialog o o ee 239 Figure 171 ITS 90 Settings Low Range tab 240 Figure 172 ITS 90 Settings High Range tab 241 Figure 173 IPTS 68 Settings dialog o o 242 Figure 174 Callendar Van Dusen Settings dialog 243 Figure 175 PT100 Settings dialog o o e 244 Figure 176 High Temp PRT Settings dialog o o 245 Figure 177 Polynomial Settings dialog o ee 246 Figure 178 W T90 Settings dialog o o e 247 Figure 179 Thermistor T R Settings dialog o o 248 Figure 180 Thermistor R T Settings dialog o 249 Figure 181 Thermocouple Polynomial Settings dialog 250 Figure 182 Thermocouple Table Settings dialog 251 Figure 183 Thermocouple Polynomial Settings dialog 252 Figure 184 Thermocouple Type Polynomial Settings dialog 254 Table 1 Troubleshooting Common Problems 259 xi 1 Introduction What is LogWare 1 1 Introduction What is Log Ware The 9935 LogWare II Software LogWare is a real time data acquisition stor age and analysis program designed specifically for use with the following Hart Scientific s multi channel digital thermometer readouts 1523 and 1524 Handheld Thermometer readouts 1529 1529
15. 4 4 4 4 If the channel mode is set to Scanner sequence select the scanner sequence mode using the Scanner sequence mode drop down list The scanner sequence mode can be set to on of the following options e Scanner channels only e Input 2 and scanner channels e Alternate input 2 scanner channels e Alternate scanner channel 1 scanner channels e User defined scanner sequence If the scanner sequence mode is set to Scanner channels only Input 2 and scan ner channels Alternate input 2 scanner channels or Alternate scanner channel 1 scanner channels the Seq channels setting must be set and is enabled If the scanner sequence mode is set to User defined scanner sequence the user de fined scanner sequence settings must be set and are enabled If the scanner sequence mode is set to Scanner channels only Input 2 and scan ner channels Alternate input 2 scanner channels or Alternate scanner channel 1 scanner channels enter the number of scanner channels to include in the scanner sequence in the Seq channels box provided or use the up down buttons If the scanner sequence mode is set to User defined scanner sequence the user defined scanner sequence can be configured using the Steps Scanner se quence and Step channel controls Enter the number of steps in the user defined scanner sequence in the Steps box provided or use the up down buttons The number of steps in a user defined scanner sequence can be set to any value between 1
16. Hart Scientific 9 9935 LogWare ll Real Time Data Acquisition Software User s Guide 9935 ugeng0000 051001 Fluke Corporation Hart Scientific Division Hart warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a pe riod as stated in our current product catalog from the date of shipment This war ranty extends only to the original purchaser and shall not apply to any product which in Hart s sole opinion has been subject to misuse alteration abuse or abnor mal conditions of operation or handling Software is warranted to operate in accordance with its programmed instructions on appropriate Hart products It is not warranted to be error free Hart s obligation under this warranty is limited to repair or replacement of a product which is returned to Hart within the warranty period and is determined upon exam ination by Hart to be defective If Hart determines that the defect or malfunction has been caused by misuse alteration abuse or abnormal conditions or operation or handling Hart will repair the product and bill the purchaser for the reasonable cost of repair To exercise this warranty the purchaser must forward the product after calling or writing Hart for authorization Hart assumes NO risk for in transit damage For service or assistance please contact the manufacturer THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS PURCHASER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF AL
17. Settings Model Serial Identification Channels fi 560 al C256 HART 1 5604102561 38 Filtering Sampling Measurement Modules TF Enable moving average filter i md reading Apply Figure 67 1560 Black Stack Settings dialog The 1560 Black Stack must be connected to an available COM port and the communication settings must be properly configured so that this information can be read in from the thermometer readout If communication with the ther mometer readout is not successful an error message is displayed and this dia log is blank A progress dialog is displayed while the current thermometer readout settings are being read in The Model box indicates the model number of the thermometer readout The Serial box indicates the serial number assigned to this thermometer readout The Identification box indicates the manufacturer name model number serial number and firmware version installed in this thermometer readout The Chan nels box indicates the total number of input channels on this thermometer readout The filtering settings can be viewed and or modified by selecting the Filtering tab The sampling settings can be viewed and or modified by selecting the Sam pling tab The measurement settings can be viewed and or modified by select ing the Measurement tab The Modules tab displays a list of modules currently attached to this thermometer readout and allows access to module settings dialogs The sett
18. The graph is located at the bottom of the log session window The graph gives a visual representation of the readings on all enabled channels The trace for each enabled channel can be toggled on or off The Graph column in the Channels grid indicates the current state of the trace for each channel To 35 User s Guide 36 show or hide the trace for the selected channel either double click on the chan nel or right click on the Channels grid and select the Show Trace option in the popup menu or select the Show trace option in the View menu The Yaxis of the graph is always labeled in the session temperature scale that was selected on the Log Session Settings dialog The Y axis is automatically scaled to keep the entire visible portion of all traces within the graph bounds As traces are shown and or hidden the graph should automatically rescale to maximize the resolution Note For readings on all channels that are configured for non tempera ture units i e Ohms or mV the units of the Y axis are assumed to be in the appropriate units for that channel The X axis of the graph displays the current time according to the computer s clock As the traces reach the right side of the graph the traces shift to the left and the left most part of the traces are pushed off the graph The graph is set to display 600 readings on the X axis at a time This setting is fixed and cannot be changed Gridlines can be automatically displayed
19. dicates the serial number assigned to this module The Identification box indi cates the module name number of devices model number serial number and firmware version installed in this module The Channels box indicates the num ber of input channels on this module General module settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the General tab The Channels tab displays a list of the channels on this module and allows access to channel settings dialogs The module calibration information can be viewed and modified by selecting the Calibration tab After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new module settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dia log closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the module settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options 115 User s Guide 116 4 4 3 9 1 To close this dialog without writing the module settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Genera
20. log Both output files and download files can be opened in the Previous Log Session window These files should have a txt extension To cancel opening a file click the Cancel button Otherwise select up to 10 files to open and click the Open button If more than 10 files are selected only the first 10 files are opened and the rest are ignored For more details about output files please re 41 User s Guide 42 2 5 1 fer to Section 7 2 1 Output file For more details about download files please refer to Section 7 2 2 Download file Note To open an output file that was created when using the Write all ac quired data to the same file option multiple data sets in the same file you must not select more than one file on the Windows Open dialog If the file contains data from more than 10 channels only the data from the first 10 channels will be displayed Data sets from each channel are sepa rated into individual files and may be opened in another window if de sired A message is displayed if the selected file contains more than 10 data sets and indicates the names and path where the files are located A progress dialog is displayed as each of the selected files are read in and ana lyzed As each of the files is read in a tab is created in the Channels section of the window and statistical data is calculated Each channel is automatically as signed a trace color that can be changed at any time The X axis of the graph a
21. r Callendar Van Dusen Settings Open RO fi 00 245456465 Save As ALPHA 0 0038563221 3 DELTA 7 1 50723 E EA 0 1343 Help Figure 174 Callendar Van Dusen Settings dialog If the Callendar Van Dusen coefficients were read in from the thermometer readout the boxes are filled with the current coefficient values Enter the R0 ALPHA DELTA and BETA coefficients from the Report of Cal ibration All boxes must contain valid values Select the Open button to display the Windows Open dialog to open a previ ously saved configuration file which contains Callendar Van Dusen coeffi cients Select the Save As button to display the Windows Save As dialog to save the current Callendar Van Dusen coefficients to a configuration file Click the OK button to accept the current coefficients and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 243 User s Guide 244 9 4 PT100 Settings dialog The PT100 Settings dialog allows the RO coefficient to be entered PT100 Settings m PT100 Settings Open RO fi 00 02356 Save As CA oa Cancel Help Figure 175 PT100 Settings dialog If the PT100 coefficient was read in from the thermometer the box is filled with the current coefficient value Enter the RO coefficient from the Rep
22. 2 28 2002 11 00 154M 27 85 C Low 2 28 2002 11 00 18 AM 27 86 C Low Figure 21 File Viewer window The data grid displays the contents of the file at the time the viewer window is displayed The data displayed in the data grid will vary depending on the con tents of the file being viewed To update the data in the data grid click the Refresh button The contents of file will be read in again and the data grid is updated To print the contents of the indicated file to the default printer click the Print button The Statistics button is shown if there is statistical data associated with the dis played data To see the statistical data click the Statistics button The Statistics dialog is displayed Please refer to Section 2 4 9 Statistics Dialog for more de tails on this dialog The Close button closes this window 39 User s Guide 40 2 4 9 2 5 Statistics dialog The Statistics dialog displays the current statistical values Only the values for the enabled statistics are displayed m Statistics Reset Elapsed time 00 00 12 Count 250 Minimum 26 508 C Maximum 26 572 C Spread 0 064 C Average 26 5490 C Standard deviation 0 0210 C Figure 22 Statistics dialog If the Sliding window statistical setting is enabled the statistical values are based on the number of readings specified for the sliding window Otherwise the statistical values are based on all read
23. Communication error 261 Figures and Tables Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 9935 LogWare II Main Display o o 9 File Toolbar bad cad ak She ia od 10 Datalog Toolbar o e 10 Graph Toolbat ss kb e E a BO A ae a DR a we 10 Tools Toolbar Hita Gs BP Gaels eS ae eA ee ea 11 Help Toolbar 2 5 uses oe Ge e eee eG HO 11 File Menu 3 cso Oe Hime Boe Bere OMe a EA ee we 13 Datalo Menu os sesion GOR GE OS a SG a 15 Log Session Settings dialog 2 0 o o 17 Log Session Settings Thermometer tab 19 Log Session Settings Log Session tab 22 Log Session Settings Channels Tab 24 Delayed Start Date Time Dialog o o 26 Alarm Settings dial08 o o e a 27 Statistics Settings dialog o o 30 Real time log session WINdO0W o e 31 Channels popup MENU 20200000 34 Graph popup Me 0 002000 0008 36 Current Alarm Settings dialog 2
24. Demand log 64 00 full Clear Demand Log Figure 35 1523 Log Status dialog The Demand log progress bar indicates the current state of the demand log The demand log in the 1523 Handheld Thermometer readout holds up to 25 readings To clear all readings from the demand log click the Clear Demand Log button To refresh the log status information on this dialog click the Refresh button The log status is read in from the thermometer readout again and the dialog is updated To close this dialog click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 3 Downloading logged data Log status dialogs 3 4 2 1524 Handheld log status dialog The Model 1524 Handheld Thermometer readout can store readings in any of two logs demand log and auto log LogWare can display the current status of these logs and provides a way to clear all readings from these logs When the Log Status option in the Download menu is selected and the 1524 Thermome ter readout is selected on the Select Model dialog the 1524 Log Status dialog is displayed 1524 Log Status Refresh Demand log 8 00 full A Clear Demand Log Auto log 5 39 full oo KA Clear Auto Log Figure 36 1524 Log Status dialog The Demand log progress bar indicates the current state of the demand log The demand log in the 1524 Handheld Thermometer readout holds up to 25 readings
25. Enter the new name for the demand log label After all labels have been modified as needed click the OK button to write the new label names to the thermometer readout A progress dialog is displayed while the new label names are being written to the thermometer readout If no labels were modified or to close this dialog without writing the new label names to the thermometer readout click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 1529 Chub E4 logging labels The Model 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout including models 1529 1529 R and 1529 T can store readings into logs When readings are stored in a log a label can be assigned to each reading or set of readings to indicate the reason purpose or to otherwise identify the reading s LogWare provides a tool that can be used to view and or modify the current logging label settings When the Logging Labels option in the Tools menu is selected and the 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout is selected on the Select Model dialog the 1529 Chub E4 Logging Labels dialog is displayed 1529 Chub E4 Logging Labels m 1529 Chub E4 Logging Labels Label name ae DATA 04 1 FURNACE 3 Apply gt Cancel Help Figure 43 1529 Chub E4 Logging Labels dialog Reset All When the Logging Labels dialog is displayed the current logging labels are read in from the thermometer readout The Labels list indicates the cur
26. Figure 147 Graph Settings Legend tab o o 190 Figure 148 Tools Menu sea eee ee be ee eee ee es 192 Figure 149 LogWare Options Dialog o 193 Figure 150 LogWare Options General tab o 194 Figure 151 LogWare Options Folders tab o 197 Figure 152 LogWare Options Toolstab o o 198 Figure 153 LogWare Options Admin Passcode tab 199 Figure 154 Enter Passcode dialog o e 200 Figure 155 Change Passcode dialog o 201 Figure 156 Window menu e 202 Figure 157 Help menu 000 asss asc ca es a e das 203 Figure 158 About LogWare dialog o e 203 Figure 159 Excel XP Text Import Wizard Step10f3 211 Figure 160 Excel XP data 0 5 44 20 lt lt es 212 Figure 161 Excel XP Text Import Wizard Step20f3 212 Figure 162 Excel XP Chart Wizard Step 1 of 4 Chart Type 213 Figure 163 Excel XP graph es oso ee ee ee i has eee 214 Figure 164 IR dongle s e spoue a a Eee Ee ee 220 Figure 165 Unlock Code dialog 2 essare waa a eya 223 Figure 166 Output file example eae a a e ei 230 Figure 167 Download file example o oo 231 Figure 168 Alarm log file example o o 232 Figure 169 Downloaded Files dialog o o
27. IPTS 68 Settings Open Scale fiTs 30 y Save As Ro Ad 100 2454564 4 45645646E 05 ALPHA C4 0 00392597 5 4545646E 05 DELTA fi 496334 Figure 173 IPTS 68 Settings dialog If the IPTS 68 coefficients were read in from the thermometer readout the boxes are filled with the current coefficient values Select the scale to use from the Scale drop down list Scale choices include IPTS 68 and ITS 90 If the thermometer readout being used does not support the Scale setting this drop down list is not displayed Enter the RO ALPHA DELTA A4 and C4 coefficients from the Report of Calibration in the boxes provided All boxes must contain valid values Select the Open button to display the Windows Open dialog to open a previ ously saved configuration file which contains IPTS 68 coefficients Select the Save As button to display the Windows Save As dialog to save the current IPTS 68 coefficients to a configuration file Click the OK button to accept the current coefficients and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 9 Conversion settings dialogs Callendar Van Dusen Settings dialog 9 3 Callendar Van Dusen Settings dialog The Callendar Van Dusen Settings dialog allows the RO ALPHA DELTA and BETA coefficients to be entered Callendar Yan Dusen Settings
28. J K L M N R S T and U The choices in the list may be limited depending on the thermocouple types supported by the thermometer being used Enter the values for all thermocouple polynomial coefficients from the Report of Calibration If any coefficients are not used leave the boxes blank or set the values to 0 0 The actual number of boxes displayed depends on the thermome ter being used Click the Open button to display the Windows Open dialog to open a previ ously saved configuration file which contains Thermocouple Type Polynomial coefficients Click the Save As button to display the Windows Save As dialog to save the current Thermocouple Type Polynomial coefficients to a configura tion file Click the OK button to accept the current coefficients and close this dialog 254 9 Conversion settings dialogs Thermocouple Type Polynomial Settings dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 255 10 Troubleshooting Technical support 10 10 1 Troubleshooting The following sections describe in detail some troubleshooting topics possible causes and solutions Technical support Please contact one of the following authorized Service Centers to coordinate service on your product Fluke Corporation Hart Scientific Division 799 E Utah Valley Drive American Fork Utah 84003 9775 US
29. M Show F Through Axes Show Even fi Inside Axes Style Minor 5 Tos Outside Axes Color FE 4 oe Figure 143 Graph Settings Axis tab Note To restore the axes to their default settings select the Restore De fault Settings option in the Graph menu Select the axis for which changes are to be made using the Apply to Axis op tion The other controls on this tab change to reflect the current settings of the selected axis By default the Y Overlay and Z axes options do not apply to the graph and are not enabled Select the color for the X and Y axes by selecting a color bar from the Color of Axes drop down list This setting applies to both axes and is therefore inde pendent of the current Apply to Axis setting By default this option is set to black The Position options allow the X axis to be positioned on either the top or bot tom of the graph and the Y axis to be positioned on either the left or right side of the graph Selecting the Variable option allows the graph itself to determine whether to position the axes on the top bottom left or right side By default the X axis is set to Bottom and the Y axis is set to Left The Scale options allow the user to determine the minimum and maximum val ues for an axis Each option is described below 183 User s Guide 184 e Zero Origin This option draws the selected axis including the origin zero and extending far enough in the positive an
30. Misc Moving average f E Figure 56 1529 Chub E4 Settings Filtering tab The Moving average setting is sometimes also called a sliding window filter Enter the number of readings to average size of window in the box provided Setting this option to any value other than 1 causes the thermometer readout to display the average of the last n readings on a specific channel as the current reading for that channel If the moving average is set to 1 the most recent mea surement on each channel is displayed as the current reading The moving aver age can be set to any value between and 10 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 2 2 Sampling tab Select the Sampling tab to view and or modify sampling settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Mise Units Resolution Sample interval E Re Auto ss 1 sec E Decimal format Date format Time format period Me MM DD YY 24 hour y I Stamp all measurements with date and time Figure 57 1529 Chub E4 Settings Sampling tab Select the units to use when displaying readings in temperature using the Units drop down list Temperature readings can be displayed in either C F or K This setting applies to all channels that are configured to display readings in temperature Select the resolution for the readings using the Resolution drop down list The resolution can be set to any value between 0 and 4 or Auto Select the time interva
31. Otherwise if the correct passcode is entered the Change Passcode dialog is displayed To change the current administrator passcode enter the new passcode in the New passcode box Then confirm the new passcode by entering the passcode again in the Confirm passcode box Click the OK button to save the new passcode To disable passcode protection simply leave the New passcode and Confirm passcode boxes blank and click the OK button To cancel changing the current passcode click the Cancel button 201 User s Guide 202 5 7 5 7 1 5 7 2 5 7 3 5 7 4 5 7 5 Window menu The Window menu provides options for arranging the open log session win dows and for switching between open log session windows Cascade Tile Horizontal Tile Vertical Arrange Icons 1 Previous Log Session 1 2 Previous Log Session 2 3 Previous Log Session 3 4 Previous Log Session 4 v 5 Log Session Figure 156 Window menu Cascade The Cascade option cascades all open windows Tile horizontal The Tile Horizontal option tiles all open windows horizontally Tile vertical The Tile Vertical option tiles all open windows vertically Arrange icons The Arrange Icons option arranges the icons for all minimized windows along the bottom of LogWare s main display Window list This is a list of all currently open windows To switch to a window click on the appropriate item in the window list A check mark appears next to the
32. Start import at row E File origin Windows ANSI v Preview of file C Program Files Hart Scientific 9935 LogWare MOutputiChannel 1 txt OReading Dilarm D 23 2001 008 25 15 AM 026 560 C OLow 0 23 2001 D08 25 15 AM 026 560 C OLow Figure 159 Excel XP Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 5 Make sure the Original data type option is set to Delimited If the ther mometer and probe information is not needed set the Start import at row option to the first row containing the logged readings row 9 in this ex ample Set the File Origin option to Windows ANSI and click the Next button 211 User s Guide 212 6 The Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 dialog appears Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 a 2 x This screen lets you set the delimiters your data contains You can see how your text is affected in the preview below Delimiters M Tab I Semicolon I Comma M Space I Other E Text qualifier I 7 IV Treat consecutive delimiters as one Data preview Figure 161 Excel XP Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 7 Inthe Delimiters box select the Tab and Space options Make sure the Treat consecutive delimiters as one check box is checked and click the Finish button 8 The output file is displayed in the spreadsheet Resize the columns so the contents of each cell are visible 9 Select the Date Time and Reading columns by clicking on the gray col
33. The Chan nels box indicates the total number of input channels on this thermometer readout The sampling settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the Sampling tab The Channels tab displays a list of channels and allows access to channel and probe settings dialogs The thermometer readout s calibration settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the Calibration tab Other settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the Misc tab Some of the settings on the 1523 1524 Settings dialog may be passcode pro tected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the dialog and the Edit button is displayed The controls for the passcode protected settings are dis 73 User s Guide 74 4 4 1 1 abled To edit the protected settings click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain en abled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the thermometer readout settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout af
34. The Serial box in dicates the serial number assigned to this module The Identification box indi cates the module name number of devices model number serial number and firmware version installed in this module The Channels box indicates the num ber of input channels on this module The Channels tab displays a list of the channels on this module and allows ac cess to channel settings dialogs The module calibration information can be viewed and modified by selecting the Calibration tab After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new module settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dia log closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the module settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the module settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button 119 User s Guide 120 4 4 3 10 1 Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Channels tab Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels o
35. The date and time displayed are based on the computer s clock set tings and can be modified through the Windows Control Panel Log Ware options LogWare has many features and settings that can be customized by the user to allow LogWare to operate in certain ways Many of these settings can also be protected by an administrator passcode to prevent unauthorized persons from changing these settings For more information on these options please refer to Section 5 6 4 Options 11 2 Real time logging File menu 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 Real time logging The main purpose of Log Ware is to perform real time data acquisition from Hart Scientific multi channel digital thermometer readouts This section de scribes in detail how to configure start and stop a real time log session This section also describes the features available during a real time log session File menu The File menu contains some options for creating a new real time log session and for opening and saving real time log session configuration files Setup Start Mute All Alarms Figure 7 File Menu New The New menu option can be used to clear the current real time log session set tings and display the Log Session Settings dialog The G button on the toolbar corresponds to the New menu option When selecting the New option a prompt is displayed to confirm that the cur rent real time log session settings 1f any will be reset To abort rese
36. click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply buttons clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the thermometer readout settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new settings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Filtering tab Select the Filtering tab to view and or modify the filter settings Filtering Display Timing Scanning Channel Setup Digital Filter Enable On gt Average Count 2 Filter settings are passcode protected Figure 129 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Filtering tab 161 User s Guide 162 4 4 6 2 Use the Digital Filter Enable drop down list to select whether the digital filter 1s enabled On or disabled Off If the setting is Off the Average Count set ting is not applicable and is disabled The Average Count set the number of Display Interval measurements that are averaged by the digital filter Possible v
37. left and right sides of the graph Titles Axis Fonts l Trends Background Legend Graph Title Bottom Title Time F Left Title Title Frc or value C Horizontal Up C Down Right Title Title Horizontal C Up C Down Figure 142 Graph Settings Titles tab When you enter text for a title the Graph control adjusts the rest of the graph ing window to provide space either redrawing the graph and associated ob jects at a smaller size or decreasing the space between objects When you clear the text box for a title you disable it and provide more space for the rest of the graph If you enter a title that s too long to appear in a single line the Graph control automatically word wraps it If a title doesn t display at all it s because the Graph control can t make the font small enough to fit all the text in the space provided Increase the size of the graphing window to make the title appear Note To restore the titles to their default settings select the Restore De fault Settings option in the Graph menu Enter the top title for the graph in the Graph Title box The graph title can con tain up to 80 characters This title appears centered at the top of the graph By default the graph title is blank Enter the bottom title for the graph in the Bottom Title box The bottom title can contain up to 80 characters This title appears centered at the bottom of the 181 User s Guide
38. 143 154 Synchronize Date Time 65 192 214 7 Technical Support 203 Test Communication 21 49 68 210 221 Text Import Wizard 211 Thermistor R T Settings 249 Thermistor R T coefficients 249 Thermistor Settings 247 Thermistor T R Settings 248 265 Index Thermistor T R coefficients 248 Thermistor coefficients 247 Thermocouple Polynomial Settings 250 Thermocouple Polynomial coefficients 250 Thermocouple Table Settings 251 Thermocouple Table coefficients 252 Thermocouple Type Polynomial Settings 254 Thermocouple Type Settings 252 Thermocouple Type coefficients 253 Thermometer Settings 19 21 65 66 72 193 198 209 219 Tick Marks 184 Ticks 184 Tile Horizontal 202 Tile Vertical 202 Titles 181 Tools Toolbar 11 Tools menu 9 65 67 192 Trends 186 Typeface 186 U Unlock 223 Unlock Code 223 V View Alarm Log 34 38 231 View Readings History 35 37 229 View menu 9 178 Volts 224 W W T90 Settings 247 W T90 coefficients 247 Window menu 9 202 266 X X axis 36 42 44 182 183 Y Y axis 36 42 44 182 183 Z Zoom In 37 45 191 A about LogWare 203 accredited calibration 76 administrator passcode 11 195 198 201 210 215 217 alarm configuration file 29 228 alarm log file 34 38 179 231 alarm settings 25 27 33 34 37 178 alarms 25 alarms log 34 231 auto log 51 53 61 62 70 background style 189 battery 77 89 baud rate 4 21
39. 147 149 150 151 153 155 156 157 Figure 127 1590 Super Thermometer 11 2590 Mighty Mux II Channel Settings Probe tab o 158 Figure 128 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer settings 160 Figure 129 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Filtering tab 161 Figure 130 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Display tab 162 Figure 131 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Timing tab 163 Figure 132 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Scanning tab 164 Figure 133 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Channel setup tab 165 Figure 134 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Probe settings dialog 166 Figure 135 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Channel settings 168 Figure 136 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Rs settings 170 Figure 137 File me s s 4426224 60404 4446900 e860 5054 Yeo 173 Figure 138 Datalog Mem seot cca ee ma Goi a kaa ee a ae p e aTe s 175 Figure 139 Download Menu e 177 Figure 140 View Men s e spo su eae ee ee ee ena ee 178 Figure 141 Graph Menu s ss e as meta REAR a Ee SS 180 Figure 142 Graph Settings Titles tab o a 181 Figure 143 Graph Settings Axis tab o o 183 Figure 144 Graph Settings Fonts tab o 185 Figure 145 Graph Settings Trends tab o o o o 186 Figure 146 Graph Settings Background tab ooo o 189
40. 1529 Chub E4 PRT thermistor channel settings Calibration tab 93 1529 Chub E4 Thermocouple channel settings dialog 94 1529 Chub E4 thermocouple channel settings Probe tab 95 1529 Chub E4 thermocouple channel settings Probe tab 96 1560 Black Stack Settings dialog o 97 1560 Black Stack settings Filtering tab 98 1560 Black Stack Settings Sampling tab 99 1560 Black Stack settings Measurement tab 100 1560 Black Stack settings Modules tab 101 2560 SPRT Module Settings dialog o a 102 2560 SPRT Module Settings General tab 103 2560 SPRT Module Settings Channels tab 103 2560 SPRT Module Settings Calibration tab 104 2561 HPRT Module Settings dialog o 105 2561 HPRT Module Settings General tab 106 2561 HPRT Module Settings Channels tab 106 2561 HPRT Module Settings Calibration tab 107 2562 PRTS Module Settings dialog 108 2562 PRTS Module Settings General tab 109 2562 PRTS Module Settings Channels tab 110 2562 PRTS Module Settings Calibration tab 110 2563 STHR Module Settings dialog 111 2563 STHR Module Settings General tab 113 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Fig
41. 1529 Chub E4 must be connected to an available COM port or IR dongle and the communication settings must be properly configured so that this infor mation can be read in from the thermometer readout If communication with the thermometer readout is not successful an error message is displayed and this dialog is blank A progress dialog is displayed while the current thermome ter readout settings are being read in The Model box indicates the model number of the thermometer readout The Serial box indicates the serial number assigned to this thermometer readout The Identification box indicates the manufacturer name model number serial number and firmware version installed in this thermometer readout The Chan nels box indicates the total number of input channels on this thermometer readout The filtering settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the Filtering tab The sampling settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the Sampling tab The measurement settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the Measurement tab The Channels tab displays a list of channels and allows ac cess to channel and probe settings dialogs The settings on each of these tabs are described in detail in the following sections For more details on these set tings please refer to the thermometer readout s User s Guide Some of the settings on the 1529 Chub E4 Settings dialog may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of
42. 17 Channels popup menu The alarm settings for the selected channel can be viewed by selecting the Alarm Settings option in the popup menu or by selecting the Alarm Settings option in the View menu If the selected channel does not have any alarms con figured this menu option is disabled Selecting the Alarm Settings option dis plays the Current Alarm Settings dialog Please refer to Section 2 4 4 Current Alarm Settings Dialog for more information on this dialog The graph trace color for the selected channel can be changed while the log session is running by selecting the Trace Color option in the popup menu or by selecting the Trace Color option in the Graph menu Please refer to Section 2 4 7 Trace Color Dialog for more details on using the Trace Color dialog The color of the channel in the Channels grid statistics list and the graph trace are all updated to the new color The Show Trace option in the popup menu indicates whether the trace for this channel is currently shown on the graph A check appears next to this menu op tion is the trace is visible The Graph column of the Channels grid also indi cates whether the trace is currently shown on the graph To toggle showing the trace for the selected channel on the graph select the Show Trace option in the popup menu or select the Show Trace option in the View menu The View Alarm Log option in the popup menu displays the alarm log file for this log session Every time an alarm i
43. 31 1529 Chub E4 Download Options dialog Selecting the Separate readings by channel option causes all of the downloaded readings to be separated according to the channel that each reading was taken from and written into separate files If the Prompt to enter filename s check box is checked a prompt is displayed after the data is downloaded for each file that needs to be created depending on the other selections above If this option is not checked the default filenames are used After selecting the appropriate options on this dialog click the Download but ton to start the download process For more details on the download process please refer to Section 8 Download Process 3 Downloading logged data Download options dialogs 3 3 4 To close this dialog click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 1560 Black Stack download options dialog The Model 1560 Black Stack Thermometer readout stores the values of up to the last 1 000 readings taken in the thermometer readout s memory and is re ferred to by LogWare as the history log LogWare can download the readings from the history log and write the readings into download files For more infor mation on download files please refer to Section 7 2 2 Download File When the Download Logged Data option in the Download menu is selected and the 1560 Black Stack Thermometer readout is selected on the Select Model dialog the 1560
44. COM port on the computer to which the thermometer readout is con nected using the COM port drop down list Only COM ports that the operating system reports as being available can be used The following symbols are used to show the status of each COM port e Y _ Indicates a COM port that is currently available y Indicates the COM port that is currently selected by LogWare eG Indicates a COM port that is currently being used by another appli cation e Fe Indicates an IR port virtual COM port that is currently available e gt Indicates an IR port virtual COM port that is currently selected by LogWare 67 User s Guide 68 G Indicates an IR port virtual COM port that is currently being used by another application Select the baud rate that the computer should use to communicate over the COM port with the thermometer readout using the Baud rate drop down list The baud rate setting of the thermometer readout must be set to the same value as this setting For best results use the maximum allowable baud rate setting when possible Check the Use IR dongle option to use the thermometer readout s IR port in stead of an RS 232 cable This option is only enabled when the selected ther mometer readout has an IR port and the selected feature allows using the IR port to communicate with the thermometer readout For more information on using the IR dongle please refer to Section 6 13 Using an IR Dongle w
45. Calibration tab may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the Calibration tab and the Edit button is dis 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 8 played The other controls on this tab are disabled To edit the calibration pa rameters click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the calibration parame ter controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button Caution Do not change these values unless this module has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values located on the latest Report of Calibration for this module Changing these values voids the current calibration Select the date this module was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module Enter the values for the calibration constants in the boxes provided The cali bration constants required by the 2562 module are 0 ADJ 100 ADJ and 400 ADJ The values of these constants should be located on the Report of Calibra tion for this module 2563 STHR Module Settings dialog The 2563 Module Settings dialog displays information about the 2563 module including model number serial number identification information and the n
46. Chan nel Settings Dialog 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 4 5 Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify thermometer readout calibra tion information Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Calibration External resistor fi 00 001 25450000 Internal resistor 1 Ohm 10 Ohm ADC WARNING Changing these values voids the thermometer calibration Calibration parameters are passcode protected Figure 117 1575A Super Thermometer Settings Calibration tab A Caution Do not change these values unless this thermometer readout has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values located on the latest Report of Calibration for this thermometer readout Chang ing these values voids the current calibration Enter the value of the external reference resistor in the External resistor box provided If no external reference resistor is being used the value in this box is ignored by the thermometer readout Enter the values for the internal reference resistors in the boxes provided The Model 1575A Super Thermometer readout has four internal reference resistors 1 Ohm 10 Ohm 100 Ohm and 10K Ohm The values of these reference resis tors as well as the ADC constant value should be located on the Report of Cali bration for this thermometer readout Select the state of the internal reference resistor oven using the Oven drop down list The oven can either be turned On
47. Edit button is dis played The other controls on this tab are disabled To edit the calibration pa rameters click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the calibration parame ter controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button Caution Do not change these values unless this module has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values located on the latest Report of Calibration for this module Changing these values voids the current calibration Select the date this module was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module Enter the values for the calibration constants in the boxes provided The cali bration constants required by the 2561 module are 0 ADJ and 10 ADJ The 107 User s Guide 108 4 4 3 7 values of these constants should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module 2562 PRTS Module Settings dialog The 2562 Module Settings dialog displays information about the 2562 module including model number serial number identification information and the number of channels on this module It also allows many module specific set tings to be viewed and or modified 2562 Module Settings 2562 Mo
48. In option Please refer to Section 2 5 4 Graph Zooming for more details on using this feature The Zoom In option and toolbar button are only enabled if a previous log ses sion window is open Restore The Restore option restores the graph to its default zoom state The i button on the toolbar corresponds to the Restore option Please re fer to Section 2 5 4 Graph Zooming for more details on using this feature The Restore option and toolbar button are only enabled if a previous log ses sion window is open 191 User s Guide 192 5 5 6 5 6 5 6 1 5 6 2 Print graph The Print Graph option prints the current graph on the selected printer The graph can also be printed by selecting the Print Graph option in the File menu Tools menu The Tools menu provides options for synchronizing the thermometer readout s clock viewing and or modifying logging labels viewing and or modifying thermometer readout settings and configuring Log Ware s options Synchronize Date Time Logging Labels Thermometer Settings Options Figure 148 Tools Menu Synchronize date time The Synchronize Date Time option provides a utility to synchronize the ther mometer readout s clock to the computer s clock The Ea button on the toolbar corresponds to the Synchronize Date Time option Please refer to Section 4 1 1 Synchronize Date Time for a description of this feature The Synchronize Date Time
49. OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings To close this dialog without writing the channel settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Use the Type drop down list to select the probe type for the selected probe Possible probe types are PRT Thermistor or Resistor The Calibration Date may be used to record the date the probe was calibrated The calibration date is an optional parameter The checkbox next to the calibra tion date field indicates whether the probe s calibration date is saved in the in strument If the checkbox is checked the calibration date is saved in the instrument If the checkbox is unchecked the probe s calibration date is set to zeros in the instrument The Nominal Current is the usual sensing current that should be used to mea sure the resistance of the probe Possible values depend on the probe type selected e PRT probe can be set to any value between 0 01 and 20 0 mA e Thermistor probe can be set to any value between 0 001 and 0 1 mA e Resistor probe can be set to any value between 0 001 and 20 mA The Maximum Current sets a limit for the probe s sensing current Possible val ues depend on the probe type selected
50. Probe tab and the Edit button is displayed The other controls on this tab are disabled except the Conversion Settings button If the selected conversion type does not have any settings this button should also be disabled To edit the probe settings click the Edit button and enter the cur rent passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the probe setting controls are enabled and the values may be changed The con trols remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button Enter the serial number of the probe attached to this channel in the probe serial number box The serial number can be any combination of numbers and or let ters up to 8 characters in length The dash character can also be used in se rial numbers Select the type of cold junction compensation to use on the selected channel us ing the CJC type drop down list Available choices are Internal and External If External is chosen as the CJC type the external CJC temperature must be en tered in the CJC temperature box Enter the external CJC temperature value in the CJC temperature box This box is disabled if the CJC type is set to Internal Note The CJC temperature value must always be in C Select the conversion type to use for the probe on this channel Available con version types will vary depending on the module that this channel belongs to Refer to the Report of Cali
51. Section 1 1 What is LogWare for a complete list of supported thermometer readouts Communications requirements The thermometer readout being used with Log Ware must be connected to an RS 232 serial port COM port on a computer using a null modem cable For more information on this type of cable refer to the thermometer readout s User s Guide The baud rate of the thermometer readout must be set to match the baud rate selected in LogWare Log Ware supports a wide choice of baud rate settings depending on the thermometer readout being used Selected features of Log Ware can also utilize an IR dongle with thermometer readouts that have an IR port for wireless communications Computer hardware requirements The following minimum computer configuration is required to use Log Ware e IBM Compatible 486 PC or better with 8MB RAM Pentium class pro cessor with 16MB RAM or more recommended e VGA monitor or better e CD ROM drive for installation e 1 RS 232 serial COM port e Optional IR dongle 1 Introduction Requirements 1 4 3 1 4 4 e Minimum of about 25MB of disk space for installation additional space 1s required as data is acquired or downloaded Computer software requirements A Note To use LogWare Windows login accounts must be granted full ac cess to the folder to which the software is installed and all subfolders If the folder has read only access errors will occur when LogWare attempts to acces
52. Select the channel to view and or modify from the Channels list This list indi cates the channel number with respect to this module and the serial number of the probe on each channel Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate channel settings di alog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel are read in from the thermometer readout The Channel Settings dialog is described in detail in Section 4 4 3 14 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings Dialog Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify module calibration informa tion General Channels Calibration Calibration date Edit DADJ 1K ADJ 4K ADJ 0 0004 0 0140 i 0052 WARNING Changing these values voids the module calibration ar Calibration parameters are passcode protected Figure 107 2568 RTDS Module Settings Calibration tab 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 14 The settings on the Calibration tab may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the Calibration tab and the Edit button is dis played The other controls on this tab are disabled To edit the calibration pa rameters click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the calibration parame ter controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed o
53. ac quire data to be identified and configured Thermometer Log Session Channels Model Serial number Session temperature scale Resolution fis23 y fa1r3o53 E z 1 H digits Thermometer Settings When the log session starts readings acquired on channels that are configured for temperature use the units indicated by the Session temperature scale setting Readings acquired on channels that are not configured for temperature use the units configured in the thermometer for that channel Communication settings COM port Baud rate E COM1 y 18200 y Test Communication Figure 10 Log Session Settings Thermometer tab Use the Model drop down list to select the type of thermometer readout to use to acquire data All other controls on this tab will be disabled until a valid model is selected Enter the serial number of the thermometer readout to use in the Serial number box The thermometer readout s serial number should be located on a label generally on the back or bottom of the thermometer readout Note Optionally you may use the Thermometer Settings button to auto matically determine the serial number of the thermometer readout and fill in this box Select the scale of the readings to be acquired from channels that are config ured to read temperature using the Session temperature scale drop down list LogWare supports the following temperature scales e C e F e K Kelvin 19 User s Guid
54. alarm state and the sixth column indicates whether the trace for each channel is currently shown on the graph Each of these col umns may be resized as desired by dragging the lines that separate each column with the mouse The current alarm state is determined by comparing the most recent reading on each channel to that channel s alarm settings If the low and or high alarms have been configured the reading is compared to the alarm values If the low alarm is enabled and the reading is less than or equal to the low alarm value the Alarm box in the Channel grid flashes Low to indicate the low alarm has tripped If the high alarm is enabled and the reading is greater than or equal to the high alarm value the Alarm box flashes High to indicate the high alarm has tripped If the reading falls between the low and high alarm values or 1f the alarms are not enabled the Alarms box remains blank alarm reset Double clicking on a row in the Channels grid toggles the state of the trace on the graph The current state for each channel is indicated in the Graph column Right clicking on the Channels grid displays a popup menu This menu consists of some of the more common options for working with channels during a 33 User s Guide 34 real time log session The menu options apply only to the currently selected channel Alarm Settings Trace Color v Show Trace View Alarm Log View Readings History Figure
55. analyzing previously ac quired data this set is the data which was previously acquired Check the Mean check box to enable a mean line which is drawn horizontally through the average value of all data points in the selected set Check the Min Max check box to enable min and max lines which are drawn horizontally through the lowest and highest data points in the selected set Check the Std Dev check box to enable a pair of standard deviation lines which are drawn horizontally through the standard deviation from the mean in both the positive and negative directions for the selected set Check the Best Fit check box to enable a best fit line which is a straight line indicating the trend of data points a first order polynomial curve for the se lected set Check the Curve Fit check box if you want to fit a curve through your data points for the selected set You can choose the type order and granularity of the curve in the Curve Fit options below These settings will apply to all curve fit lines drawn on the graph By default no trend lines are enabled Select the Curve Fit options for the curve fit statistical line The following op tions are available Curve type Description formula Variable Order Polynomial Polynomial curve of variable order Logarithmic y a b log x Exponential 1 y a exp b x Exponential 2 y a x exp b x Power y a xb Inverse 1 y a b x Inverse 2 y a b x Inverse 3 y 1 a b x
56. as da de cos di 191 5 6 3 1 5 8 5 5 9 RESTO ESA ERRADA a SAS 191 5 5 6 Printgrap lies 6 22 Seca a id e eR eS 192 Tools MENU ie 2 a 3 5 a hE we Be hE 192 5 6 1 Synchronize date time b si a p pahe a A wk we aps 192 5 6 2 Loggins labels casas ek ows 6 kis ee A RR BR Oe we Se 192 5 6 3 Thermometer Settings eee ahi GI ane Ba Ra a 193 5 6 4 Oplions inician e Da he a li dele id 193 36 41 General tab eis fg ee a A e Ge we Sle Roe 194 DO A2 Folders tapu coco sew ces Ss Beat be RSE es os awh PubMed a Re a Ce A B 197 36 43 TOO tab a ieee ee da idee ack anes hee ee Re oa ee ee a Re 198 5 6 4 4 Admin Passcode tab os a s a Bos es e Rhos Le a oes ek hk 199 Window menti oo e a ee ee E aa 202 el Cascade usina de ci at da al a ae A 202 3 1 2 Til horizontals cto rre do Ran HES Rae A e 202 5 7 3 Tile vertical wene iaa ed di A di ee dd 202 5 7 4 ATLAS ICONS y eei e e ii a eh te es a Jai Ria 202 5 75 Window Util was Dees Eat Ma eed ee Pee ee ek de 202 Help men ccs ei ee hen eee Ghee eee ee i 203 5 8 1 LogWareWelps iii ORO dale Be bs wha BL a eee A 203 5 8 2 Technical support z sare ee ge Rie es Wo eal et eee ee wae ia E 203 5 8 3 About TOE Wares ida ic is wld a bd Te Bigs ae ed Se 203 6 HOW lO cereau dana a 2 a 205 6 1 Setting up and starting a real time log session 205 6 2 Starting a real time log session unattended delayed start 205 6 3 Stopping a real time log session automatically
57. button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the module settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 8 1 4 4 3 8 2 Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog General tab Select the General tab to view and or modify general module settings General Channels Calibration Excitation current Resistance range Auto b Auto ps Figure 85 2563 STHR Module Settings General tab Select the excitation current for this module using the Excitation current drop down list The 2563 module can use either a 2 uA or a 10 uA excitation current or Auto This setting applies to all channels on this module Select the resistance range for this module using the Resistance range drop down list The 2563 module allows the selection of either Auto High or Low This setting applies to all channels on this module Channels tab Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels on this module and to access the channel settings dialogs to view and or modify channel specific settings General Channels Calibration Channels Channel Settings 2 258963 Figure 86 2563 STH
58. communication section of the ther mometer readout s User s Guide for more details on IR modes supported by the thermometer readout 262 Index Index alm file 29 197 228 cvd file 197 228 exe file 28 hpt file 197 228 168 file 197 228 190 file 197 228 ply file 197 228 rls file 14 17 174 197 227 tcp file 197 228 tct file 197 228 tcx file 197 228 thr file 197 228 txt file 41 179 197 w90 file 197 228 wav file 2 28 3 wire offset 148 159 A Add Channel 43 Alarm Log 38 179 231 Apply 70 72 74 78 81 86 90 94 97 102 105 107 108 111 112 114 115 118 119 121 122 124 127 129 130 133 136 138 146 148 150 157 159 180 Apply to Axis 183 Arrange Icons 202 Average 30 139 151 Axis 183 Backdrop 189 Background 189 Best Fit 187 Bottom Title 181 C CJC 136 COM port 20 48 67 73 221 222 261 Calibration 76 93 96 104 107 110 114 117 121 124 129 132 145 156 Callendar Van Dusen Settings 243 Callendar Van Dusen coefficients 243 Cascade 202 Change Passcode 201 217 Channel Settings 75 81 89 90 94 104 107 110 114 117 120 123 129 132 133 135 144 146 155 157 210 219 224 Channel mode 142 153 Chart Wizard 213 Color of Axes 183 Conversion Settings 31 80 83 92 95 134 137 148 159 199 215 219 224 239 Conversion configuration files 228 Current Alarm Settings 37 Curve Fit 187 D Data
59. configuration file Log Ware attempts to communi cate with the thermometer to verify that the settings saved in the configu ration file are compatible with the current thermometer configuration Therefore it is necessary to have the thermometer connected and powered on in order to successfully open a configuration file When clicking the Open button the Windows Open dialog is displayed The Config folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for configuration files on the LogWare Options dialog Real time log session con figuration files should have a rls extension To cancel opening a configuration file click the Cancel button Otherwise select the configuration file to open and click the Open button For more details about the real time log session con figuration file refer to Section 7 1 1 Log Session Configuration File Real time log session configuration files can also be opened by selecting the Open option in the File menu LogWare then reads the log session settings from the configuration file and ver ifies that the configuration of the currently connected thermometer readout is compatible with the log session settings If there are any conflicts or if LogWare is unable to communicate with the thermometer readout appropriate messages are displayed If LogWare was unable to communicate with the thermometer readout or any other error occurred the log session settings may be incomplete LogWare has
60. down lists in the Communication settings section 5 Click the Thermometer Settings button to display the Thermometer Set tings dialog for the selected thermometer readout 6 On the Thermometer Settings dialog select the desired system units us ing the Units drop down list Click the Apply button to write the new system units setting to the thermometer readout Note If a non temperature setting is selected for the system units i e Ohms Volts Ratio or W this setting will override any conversion type setting for all channels that would otherwise cause reading to be dis played in temperature Therefore it is recommended that the system units be set to a temperature setting i e C F K etc and the conversion type be used to configure channels that are to read non temperature values 7 On the Thermometer Settings dialog navigate to the first channel to configure a For thermometer readouts that support modules select the Modules tab select the module from the Modules list that the desired channel is on and click the Module Settings button The Module Settings dialog is displayed Continue with step b below b Select the Channels tab select the desired channel from the Channels list and click the Channel Settings button The Channel Settings dialog is displayed 8 To configure the selected channel to read temperature set the Conversion type to the desired setting and enter the coefficients to use as applicabl
61. e PRT probe can be set to any value between 0 01 and 20 0 mA e Thermistor probe can be set to any value between 0 001 and 0 1 mA e Resistor probe can be set to any value between 0 001 and 20 mA The Maximum Temperature sets the temperature limit for the probe Possible values depend on the probe type selected e PRT probe can be set to any value between 25 0 and 2000 0 C e Thermistor probe can be set to any value between 25 0 and 1000 0 C e Maximum temperature is not available for a resistor probe Select the conversion type to use for the selected probe The Model 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer readout supports the following conver sion types e ITS 90 e CVD ALPHA e CVD ABC e PT 100 e KT e TR 167 User s Guide 168 4 4 6 7 e Polynomial e Ohms Refer to the Report of Calibration for the selected probe for information on the conversion type that the probe was calibrated for If the selected conversion type requires coefficients or other settings the Con version Settings button is enabled Click the Conversion Settings button to dis play the dialog for the selected conversion type Otherwise the Conversion Settings button is disabled Note The conversion settings are not written to the thermometer readout until the Apply or OK button is clicked on this dialog 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Channel Settings dialog The 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer channel settings dialog displays inform
62. e f3a w 2 joo wc f18 w sho cc ho ww 4 hoo o R mW 5 poo CT 54 mv e poo c B5 mv z koo ec fz mv s 5000 CT fi45 m 9 600 0 45 iz2 mi Cancel 10 700 0 e f200 mv E e Help Figure 182 Thermocouple Table Settings dialog If the Thermocouple Table coefficients were read in from the thermometer readout the boxes are filled with the current coefficient values 251 User s Guide 252 9 11 Select the number of points to use for the Temperature Voltage table using the Number of points drop down list The choices are from 1 to 10 but may be lim ited depending on the thermometer readout being used Up to ten Temperature Voltage pairs can be entered Enter the temperature and voltage values at each temperature in the boxes provided The units for the tem perature and voltage values are indicated next to each box Select the Open button to display the Windows Open dialog to open a previ ously saved configuration file which contains Thermocouple Table coefficients Select the Save As button to display the Windows Save As dialog to save the current Thermocouple Table coefficients to a configuration file Click the OK button to accept the current coefficients and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog Thermocouple Type Settings dialog The Th
63. eS 86 442 2 Sample Cady stream ae Ged He rta e Hoa de 87 44 2 3 Measurement tabi 2 ices ain or AR Bond Be RO i Ob a A Ae 88 JAZA Channels Tabs cosas Fda le aie as as woke ae 3A as tne ewe ere E Se 88 BAD S Mistico rca eS Ra Be ACER Se Ow Gre Acs Gb a Beas 89 4 4 2 6 1529 Chub E4 PRT thermistor channel settings dialog 90 AA QOL Probatab ora ve Spi ce Saas ri ar a tread Ss Ew van Guede ey a eek 91 44 2 6 2 Calibration tab s so eceania tee 280000004 0 sa Bd BBD 93 44 2 7 1529 Chub E4 thermocouple channel settings o o o 94 AADIM PHODE BAD ss 000 306 0 a A arden he AC E bk NG ede BRP 95 442 7 2 Calibration tab oc coocrosan is ee a a 96 1560 Black Stack settings didlos lt lt a 96 AABN Fenin t a a A AA ee at A a 98 4432 Sampling tabi oia ar O aa re ee 99 44 3 3 Measurem ntiab ss esad 4 bh eid ge ee Sees die a We Bd OR a ala a e 00 AASA Modales the iss 6 005 aca So eee Ba ee Be ee R 01 4 4 3 5 2560 SPRT Module Settings Dialog 0 o o e 01 MASSA GencrallaD o e ci dod aa id a EA id an a E 103 AAAS Channels tabs iveco a a A AR RR aR EO ae 103 ARI Calibration tab 0 AA BAG e 104 44 3 6 2561 HPRT Module Settings dialog 0 o e ee 05 AAS Oil GoncraltaDica sa esis i oe ide Ee a ee Bes te daa e eRe E 106 44 3 6 2 Channels table 2 RS A A Ate ok E 106 4 4 3 6 3 Calibtation tabs aiii gia ged tna dec cd sia 10
64. exceptions The Performs real time log session but does not write acquired data to file s Downloads data from thermometer readout log s but does not write downloaded data to file s Allows thermometer readout settings to be viewed but does not write new settings to thermometer readout Allows logging labels to be viewed but does not write new logging labels to thermometer readout Some example data files are installed to provide examples of the files that demo version does not write to demo version of LogWare may be freely distributed and installed and is available for download on Hart Scientific s website for no charge The demo version may be unlocked at any time after obtaining a valid serial number from Hart Scientific Technical Support without having to reinstall the software 6 How to Setting up LogWare to read multiple scales 6 16 To unlock a demo version of LogWare Note To successfully unlock a demo version of Log Ware you must be logged into Windows as an Administrator 1 Select the Unlock option in the Help menu The Unlock option only ap pears in the Help menu for the demo version of LogWare The Unlock Code dialog appears r Unlock Code The Logw are software is currently installed as demo software Unlocking the software enables the features that are disabled in the demo version You may obtain an unlock code or serial number by contacting an Application S
65. is only supported by some of the thermometer readouts supported by LogWare When selecting the Log Status option the Select Model dialog is displayed LogWare needs to know the model of the thermometer readout in order to dis play appropriate status dialog Please refer to Section 3 2 Select Model Dialog for more details on the Select Model dialog 47 User s Guide 48 3 2 After the thermometer readout model and communication settings have been selected the appropriate Log Status dialog for the selected thermometer read out is displayed The Log Status dialogs are described in more detail in Section 3 4 Log Status Dialogs Select Model dialog When any of the Download menu options is selected the Select Model dialog is displayed Log Ware needs to know the model of the thermometer readout to interface with Select Model j m Select Model Model 1560 Si Test Communication Communication settings COM pott Baud rate 54 COMI 28400 y Cancel M Use IR dongle Help Figure 28 Select Model dialog If this dialog has been used previously to select a thermometer readout model and communication settings the previous settings are restored Use the Model drop down list to select the type of thermometer readout being used All other controls on this dialog are disabled until a model is selected The list of available thermometer readouts depends on the Download menu op tion selected Only
66. located on the latest Report of Calibration for this module Changing these values voids the current calibration Select the date this module was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module Enter the values for the calibration constants in the boxes provided The cali bration constants required by the 2567 module are 0 ADJ 1K ADJ and 4K 129 User s Guide 130 4 4 3 13 ADJ The values of these constants should be located on the Report of Calibra tion for this module 2568 RTDS Module Settings The 2568 Module Settings dialog displays information about the 2568 module including model number serial number identification information and the number of channels on this module It also allows many module specific set tings to be viewed and or modified 2568 Module Settings m 2568 Module Settings Model Serial Identification Channels 2568 ja 8068 RTDS 1 256841806 fe General l Channels Calibration Excitation current Resistance range fot m y Auto y x Apply Front row wires Rear row wires 4 wire 4 wire z Cancel ma me Help Figure 104 2568 RTDS Module Settings dialog The Model box indicates the model number of this module The Serial box in dicates the serial number assigned to this module The Identification box indi cates the module name number of dev
67. on the computer using a null modem cable For more informa tion please refer to the thermometer readout s User s Guide When testing communications with the thermometer readout there are three possible results e The thermometer readout is communicating at the correct baud rate on the selected COM port e The thermometer readout is communicating but possibly at the wrong baud rate or the thermometer readout model does not match the selected model e The thermometer readout failed to communicate at all Check the COM port and baud rate settings make sure the cable is a null modem cable and make sure the thermometer readout is plugged in and turned on Optional The Thermometer Settings button may be clicked at this time to gain access to various thermometer readout settings as applicable to the selected thermometer readout This feature is provided solely as a convenience to check the thermometer readout configuration and or to configure each channel of the thermometer readout with appropriate conversion settings and probe coeffi cients The Test Communication button should be clicked prior to clicking the Thermometer Settings button to make sure the thermometer readout is commu nicating successfully Warning When using the Thermometer Settings tool make sure that the thermometer readout is not currently in any menu Using the thermometer readout s menus while using the Thermometer Settings tool may cause the thermometer readout
68. or modify the thermometer readout s logging labels 1 Select the Logging Labels option in the Tools menu or click the AB button on the toolbar The Select Model dialog is displayed Select the thermometer readout model Also select the COM port where the thermometer readout is con nected and the baud rate to use Make sure LogWare can communicate with the thermometer readout by clicking the Test Communication but ton Click the OK button when communication is successful LogWare displays the Logging Labels dialog and attempts to read in the current logging label settings This dialog is specific to the selected ther mometer readout Modify the labels as desired on the Logging Labels dialog To write the new logging label settings to the thermometer readout click the OK button Please refer to Section 4 3 Logging Labels Dialogs for more information Unlocking a demo version of Log Ware When Log Ware is purchased a serial number is supplied on a sticker typically located on the CD pouch on the inside back cover of the LogWare User s Guide When LogWare is installed a dialog appears and asks for the serial number If a valid serial number is entered LogWare is installed as a full working version If an invalid serial number is entered Log Ware is installed as a demo version The demo version of LogWare never expires The demo version is identical to the full working version with the following
69. readings are displayed on the graph as if they came from the same channel single trace Select the color to use for this channel s trace on the graph using the Trace color drop down list LogWare supports 15 different trace colors By default each channel is assigned one of the 15 colors If the trace for the selected channel is to be shown on the graph check the Show on graph check box Once the log session starts each channel can be shown or hidden at any time This setting only determines which channels are shown initially when the log session starts Continue configuring the other channels as needed by selecting the next chan nel in the list and following this process again Delayed Start Date Time dialog The Delayed Start Date Time dialog allows the real time log session to be scheduled to start at a future date and or time Delayed Start Date Time E Delayed Start Date Time 12 31 2001 2 30 00 AM Start log session on this date At this time Teo pes December 2001 gt 2 30 00 AM 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 A 24D 1 23 4 5 Current date and time Cancel 1273172001 2 26 54 PM Help Figure 13 Delayed Start Date Time Dialog Select the date on which the log session should start by clicking on the appro priate date in the calendar Today s date is indicated by the red outline circle The currently selected date is indicate
70. reset To view the contents of the alarm log file during a real time log session select the Alarm Log option in the View menu or right click on the Channels grid and select the View Alarm Log option in the popup menu The alarm log file is described in detail in Section 7 2 3 Alarm Log File Trace color dialog The Trace Color dialog allows a new color to be selected for the graph trace Trace color Trace color Trace color E Light Blue y Cancel Help Figure 20 Trace color dialog The current trace color is selected when the dialog is displayed Select the new color using the Trace color drop down list Click the OK button to save the settings you have selected and to close the dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes and close the dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 2 Real time logging Real time log session 2 4 8 File Viewer window The File Viewer window displays the contents of the indicated file Fle viewer oe m Channel 1 txt Refresh 2 28 2002 10 59 45AM_ 27 84 C Low Print 2 28 2002 10 59 48 4M 27 83 C Low 2 28 2002 10 59 51 AM 27 82 C Low Statistics 2 28 2002 10 59 54 AM 27 82 C Low 2 28 2002 10 59 57 AM 27 82 C Low 2 28 2002 11 00 004M 27 83 C Low 2 28 2002 11 00 034M 27 83 C Low 2 28 2002 11 00 06AM 27 83 C Low 2 28 2002 11 00 094M 27 84 C Low 2 28 2002 11 00 124M 27 85 C Low
71. section allows the log to be specified The 1575A Super Thermometer readout has two logs history log and memory log The history log stores the most recent 100 readings taken by the thermometer read out The memory log can be used to store up to 100 readings manually For more details on the history and memory logs see the 1575A Super Thermome ter readout User s Guide The Readings section allows the number of readings to be downloaded to be specified Selecting the Download all readings from log option indicates that all of the readings in the selected log should be downloaded Selecting the Download last n readings from log option allows a specific num ber of readings to be downloaded from the selected log If this option is se 57 User s Guide 58 3 3 6 lected enter the number of readings to download in the readings box This value can be set between 1 and 100 Note It is not possible for Log Ware to determine exactly how many read ings are currently stored in the memory log Therefore memory locations that do not have a value stored in them always return a value of 0 C Enter the resolution to use to format the readings when they are written to the download file in the Resolution box This value can be set between 0 and 8 dig its places after decimal point Select the options regarding the file to create in the Files section If the Prompt to enter filename check box is checked a prompt is displayed af
72. standard C1 and C2 polynomial coefficients Enter the values for DC1 and DC2 These values should be located on the Report of Calibration Select the Open button to display the Windows Open dialog to open a previ ously saved configuration file which contains Thermocouple Type coefficients Select the Save As button to display the Windows Save As dialog to save the current Thermocouple Type coefficients to a configuration file Click the OK button to accept the current coefficients and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 253 User s Guide 9 12 Thermocouple Type Polynomial Settings dialog The Thermocouple Type Polynomial Settings dialog allows the standard ther mocouple type and the CO C1 C2 and C3 coefficients to be entered Thermocouple Type Polynomial Settings m Thermocouple Type Polynomial Settings Open Thermocouple type Den k z A CO 018745453 C1 0 0003548454 EZ 0 0000045784 C3 Cancel 0 0000091 215484 dili Figure 184 Thermocouple Type Polynomial Settings dialog If the Thermocouple Type coefficients were read in from the thermometer the boxes are filled with the current coefficient values The Thermocouple Type drop down list allows the standard thermocouple type to be selected Thermocouple types include B C E
73. sure that the thermometer is turned on Use the buttons on the front panel of the thermometer to exit from any open menu Is the correct model selected Make sure that the selected thermometer readout model matches the model of the thermometer readout being used Each thermometer has its own set of commands and some thermometer readouts do not recognize the commands for other thermometer readouts If using the IR dongle Is the IR dongle connected to the correct COM port Make sure that the IR dongle is connected to the selected COM port Is the correct type of IR dongle being used Make sure the correct type of IR dongle is being used Log Ware cannot use IR ports that are built into the computer Refer to Using an IR dongle with Log Ware for more details Is the path between the IR dongle and the IR window of the thermometer readout unobstructed Make sure that the IR dongle is placed in close proximity of the thermometer readout s IR window and that there are no objects between them that could obstruct the signal Refer to the IR com munication section of the thermometer readout s User s Guide for more details on the placement of the IR dongle Is the thermometer readout s IR communication mode set properly The IR port on some thermometer readouts can be configured to operate in different modes Log Ware requires that the IR port be set to operate in 261 User s Guide COMMAND mode Refer to the IR
74. synchronizing the thermometer readout s clock viewing modifying logging labels and viewing modifying thermometer readout settings Synchronize Date Time Logging Labels Thermometer Settings Options Figure 39 Tools menu Synchronize date time The Synchronize Date Time option can be used to synchronize the thermometer readout s clock to the computer s clock All thermometer readouts supported by LogWare support this feature When selecting the Synchronize Date Time option the Select Model dialog is displayed LogWare needs to know the model of the thermometer readout in or der to send the proper commands to synchronize the thermometer readout s clock Please refer to Section 4 2 Select Model Dialog for more details on the Select Model dialog After the thermometer readout model and communication settings have been selected the appropriate commands are sent to the thermometer readout to up date its date and time settings as applicable to the selected thermometer read out After the commands have been sent a message is displayed indicating that the thermometer readout s clock has been updated Note Before synchronizing the thermometer readout s clock make sure the computer s clock is accurate Use the Windows Control Panel to ad just the date and time as necessary 65 User s Guide 66 A Note The thermometer readout s display may not immediately reflect the updated time Loggi
75. ter the data is downloaded for the file that needs to be created If this option is not checked the default filename is used After selecting the appropriate options on this dialog click the Download but ton to start the download process For more details on the download process please refer to Section 8 Download Process To close this dialog click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 1590 Super Thermometer II download options The Model 1590 Super Thermometer II readout can store readings in any of two logs history log and memory log LogWare can download the readings from these logs and write the readings into download files For more informa tion on download files please refer to Section 7 2 2 Download File When the Download Logged Data option in the Download menu is selected and the 1590 Super Thermometer II readout is selected on the Select Model dialog the 1590 Super Thermometer IT Download Options dialog is displayed Figure 34 The Select log to download section allows the log to be specified The 1590 Super Thermometer II readout has two logs history log and memory log The history log stores the most recent 100 readings taken by the thermometer read out The memory log can be used to store up to 100 readings manually For more details on the history and memory logs see the 1590 Super Thermometer II readout User s Guide The Readings section allows the numbe
76. the Probe serial number box The serial number can be any combination of numbers and or letters up to 8 characters in length The dash character can also be used in serial numbers Select the reference resistor for the selected probe using the Reference drop down list The choices for the reference resistor are e External resistor e 1Ohm 10 Ohm 100 Ohm 10K Ohm Note The External resistor option is not available for Input 2 because the external reference resistor must be connected to Input 2 147 User s Guide 148 4 4 5 Enter the excitation current for the selected probe in the Current box provided The excitation current can be set to any value between 0 0001 and 21 0 mA Enter the 3 wire offset value for the selected probe in the 3W offset box pro vided The 3 wire offset can be set to any value between 0 and 1 000 000 ohms Select the conversion type to use for the selected probe The Model 1575A Super Thermometer readout supports the following conversion types e ITS 90 e IPTS 68 e CVD Callendar Van Dusen e W T90 e R T e T R e Polynomial e Ohms e Ratio Refer to the Report of Calibration for the selected probe for information on the conversion type that the probe was calibrated for If the selected conversion type requires coefficients or other settings the Con version Settings button is enabled Otherwise the Conversion Settings button is disabled Click the Conversion Settings butt
77. the boxes provided If any coefficients are not used leave the boxes blank or set the values to 0 0 9 Conversion settings dialogs Thermistor Settings dialog 9 8 2 Thermistor R T Settings dialog If the selected conversion type is R T the Thermistor R T Settings dialog is displayed Thermistor R T Settings m Thermistor A T Settings 7 Open BO fa 9745456E01 Save As B1 5 4545647E 01 B2 3 7004546E 04 B3 Cancel le 345465E 07 Help tio Figure 180 Thermistor R T Settings dialog Enter the values for all Thermistor R T coefficients from the Report of Cali bration in the boxes provided If any coefficients are not used leave the boxes blank or set the values to 0 0 249 User s Guide 250 9 9 Thermocouple Polynomial Settings dialog The Thermocouple Polynomial Settings dialog allows the mV 25C CO Cl C2 C15 coefficients to be entered Thermocouple Polynomial Settings i Thermocouple Polynomial Settings _ Open mv 250 fi 2245 Save As CO C8 0 0000000 oo Gl ES 2 4543452E 01 Esa C10 6 4545465 03 ES C11 1 4455456E 05 C4 Ela 5 4564564E D7 ES C13 7 4542343E 09 CE C14 r 7 5 4545647E 12 s C C15 Cancel Help Figure 181 Thermocouple Polynomial Settings dialog If the Thermocouple Polynomial coefficients were read in from the thermome ter readout the boxes are f
78. the dialog and the Edit button is displayed The controls for the passcode protected settings are 85 User s Guide 86 4 4 2 1 disabled To edit the protected settings click the Edit button and enter the cur rent passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings Log Ware has a feature that causes all of the thermometer readout settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new settings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Filtering tab Select the Filtering tab to view and or modify the filter settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels
79. thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the channel settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Probe tab Select the Probe tab to view and or modify probe settings Probe Calibration Probe serial number 362568 Range Wires 100 Ohm y 4 wire y Conversion type ITS 90 v Conversion Settings Figure 62 1529 Chub E4 PRT thermistor channel settings Probe tab Enter the serial number of the probe attached to this channel in the Probe serial number box The serial number can be any combination of numbers and or let ters up to 8 characters in length The underscore _ character can also be used in serial numbers Select the resistance range for this channel using the Range drop down list The choices for the resistance range are 100 Ohm or 10K Ohm Select the wires for this channel using the Wires drop down list The choices for the wires setting are 2 wire 3 wire or 4 wire Select the conversion type to use for the probe on this channel The Model 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout supports the following conversion types e ITS 90 91 User s Guide 92 e ITS SR5 ITS 90 subrange 5 only e CVD Callendar Van Dusen e PTI100 e R T e TR e YSI 400 e Ohms Refer to the Report of Calibration for the probe f
80. thermometer readout 2 Parse the data 3 Write the data to download file When the download process starts a progress dialog appears to indicate the download progress To abort downloading the data from the thermometer read out click the Cancel button on the progress dialog 235 User s Guide 236 8 4 If the Prompt to enter filename option was selected the Windows Save As di alog is displayed to get the name of the file that the data should be saved to once the data has been downloaded The Download folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for download files on the LogWare Options dialog Accept the default filename or enter new filename and click the Save button to continue If a file with the selected filename already exists confirm overwriting the existing file or enter a new filename Clicking the Can cel button on the Windows Save As dialog aborts the download process If the Prompt to enter filename option was not selected the data is saved to a file with the default filename download txt Once all of the downloaded data has been saved into the specified file the file name is displayed on the Downloaded Files dialog see Figure 169 on page 233 To open the file that downloaded data was written to double click the entry in the list The file will be opened in the File Viewer window For more details on the File Viewer window please refer to Section 2 4 8 File Viewer Window
81. thermometer readouts that support the selected feature are listed Select the COM port on the computer to which the thermometer readout is con nected using the COM port drop down list Only COM ports that the operating system reports as being available can be used The following symbols are used to show the status of each COM port e Y Indicates a COM port that is currently available we Indicates the COM port that is currently selected by Log Ware d Indicates a COM port that is currently being used by another appli cation e Tf Indicates an IR port virtual COM port that is currently available 3 Downloading logged data Select Model dialog e ns Indicates an IR port virtual COM port that is currently selected by Log Ware Indicates an IR port virtual COM port that is currently being used by another application Select the baud rate that the computer should use to communicate over the COM port with the thermometer readout using the Baud rate drop down list The baud rate setting of the thermometer readout must be set to the same value as this setting For best results use the maximum allowable baud rate setting when possible Check the Use IR dongle option to use the thermometer readout s IR port in stead of an RS 232 cable This option is only enabled when the selected ther mometer readout has an IR port and the selected download feature allows using the IR port to communicate with the t
82. time logging saving the log session settings to a configuration file can greatly reduce the time it takes to configure and start a real time log session a The Lar button on the toolbar corresponds to the Open option 173 User s Guide 174 5 1 3 A Note When opening a configuration file Log Ware attempts to communi cate with the thermometer readout to verify that the settings saved in the configuration file are compatible with the current thermometer readout configuration Therefore it is necessary to have the thermometer readout connected and powered on in order to successfully open a configuration file When selecting the Open option the Windows Open dialog is displayed The Config folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for configuration files on the LogWare Options dialog Real time log session con figuration files should have a rls extension To cancel opening a configuration file click the Cancel button Otherwise select the configuration file to open and click the Open button For more details about the real time log session con figuration file refer to Section 7 1 1 Log Session Configuration File Real time log session configuration files can also be opened by selecting the Open button on the Log Session Settings dialog LogWare then reads the log session settings from the configuration file and ver ifies that the configuration of the currently connected thermometer readou
83. to acquire data from communications settings log session sample interval and start and end options and thermometer readout channel configuration This dialog can be displayed by selecting the Setup option in the Datalog menu or by clicking the F 2 Real time logging Log session settings dialog button on the toolbar This dialog is also displayed after opening a log session configuration file Log Session Settings 3 r Log Session Settings Open Thermometer Log Session Channels F A E Save As Model Serial number Session temperature scale Resolution f raos3 E E H dg 1529 Ni E X ja re digits Set as Default Thermometer Settings When the log session starts readings acquired on channels that are configured for temperature use the units indicated by the Session temperature scale setting Readings acquired on channels that are not configured for temperature use the units configured in the thermometer for that channel ilk Communication settings COM port Baud rate 54 COM1 y 19200 y Test Communication Close Log session settings are retained when this dialog is closed Use the le Setup option in the Datalog menu to display this dialog again Help Figure 9 Log Session Settings dialog Note This dialog displays the current real time log session settings Clicking the Close button on this dialog does not cause these settings to be lost To display this dia
84. tr ee Bodega Baws heey as 37 2 4 7 Trace Color dialogs lt or Ge Bosse a a Ee AG a te Ga Rete ea a 38 2 4 8 File Viewer window ooe 6 sae Sd ne ee Gee ee ee 39 2 4 9 Statistics sdialog os a eh ay Ree eG HS SS a a 40 Previous log SESSION o 2 2 00 0000000048 40 2 51 Channels s y ci Che eS be Ree Oe ee BE eed 42 2 32 Statisties ists ao ia ra ade e Be ee acd eB 43 2 5 3 A PEA Bai cdc Be cae Se Renee ks GPM Rw aces HER Se Heras 44 2 5 4 Graph Zooming y ci a eo aaa a eS ce 45 3 Downloading logged data 47 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 4 Tools 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 Download Menus s ss sd se ee ek bee ewe a ee ew eee 47 3 1 1 Download logged data ooo oo e 47 3 1 2 L g statuss e oia ia EE Ee ee ee a 47 Select Model dialog lt s s sieo d aaa a E o ee 48 Download options dialogs o oo oo o 50 3 31 1523 Handheld download options dialog o ooo 50 3 3 2 1524 Handheld download options dialog o 51 3 3 3 1529 Chub E4 download options dialog 2 2 o 53 3 3 4 1560 Black Stack download options dialog 55 3 3 1575A Super Thermometer download options dialog 57 3 3 6 1590 Super Thermometer II download options 58 Los stat sdialogS p s a ey See eR RA EA ed 60 3 4 1 1523 Handheld log status dialog 2 2 ee 60 3 4 2 1524 Handheld log status dialog 2 ee 61 3 4 3 1529 Chub EF4 log status dialog
85. umn headers while holding down the control key labeled A B and D as shown below 1 8 25 15 AM 26 56 C Low 2 10 23 2001 8 25 15 AM 26 56 C Low 3 10 23 2001 8 25 17 AM 26 661 C Low 4 10 23 2001 8 25 19 AM 26 561 C Low 5 10 23 2001 8 25 21 AM 26 569 C Low 6 10 23 2001 8 25 23 AM 26 559 C Low 7 10 23 2001 8 25 25 AM 26 561 C Low 8 10 23 2001 8 25 27 AM 26 572 C Low 9 10 23 2001 8 25 29 AM 26 672 C Low O 10 23 2001 8 25 31 AM 26 509 C Low 1 10 23 2001 8 25 35 AM 26 508 C Low Figure 160 Excel XP data 6 How to Importing logged data into a spreadsheet 10 In the Insert menu of Excel select the Chart option The Chart Wizard Step 1 of 4 Chart Type dialog is displayed Chart Wizard Step 1 of 4 Chart Type ax Standard Types Custom Types Chart type Chart sub type _ EOS Pie ac XY Scatter Doughnut 9 Bubble lth Stock y ine with markers displayed at each data alue Press and Hold to view Sample Figure 162 Excel XP Chart Wizard Step 1 of 4 Chart Type 11 In the Chart type list select Line and click the Finish button 213 User s Guide 6 7 214 The graph should be displayed as shown below A B 23 2001 25 23 2001 8 25 15 AM nA AM od MUTT Figure 163 Excel XP graph 13 Format and size the graph as desired Synchronizing the thermometer readout s
86. value Enter the values for the A and B coefficients from the Report of Calibration in the boxes provided Select the Open button to display the Windows Open dialog to open a previ ously saved configuration file which contains High Temperature PRT coeffi cients Select the Save As button to display the Windows Save As dialog to save the current High Temperature PRT coefficients to a configuration file Click the OK button to accept the current coefficients and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 245 User s Guide 246 9 6 Polynomial Settings dialog The Polynomial Settings dialog allows the AO Al A2 A10 coefficients to be entered Polynomial Settings l Polynomial Settings Open AQ AB f1 121313132E02 l Save As Al AT fs 454644656E 04 l A2 AB 2 45646546E05 A3 AS fs 465446646E07 l Ad A10 la 456464600E09 AB Cancel Help Figure 177 Polynomial Settings dialog If the Polynomial coefficients were read in from the thermometer readout the boxes are filled with the current coefficient values Enter the values for all polynomial coefficients from the Report of Calibration in the boxes provided If any coefficients are not used leave the boxes blank or set the values to 0 0 The actual number of boxes disp
87. 0 Black Stack and to access the Module Settings dialogs to view and or modify module specific settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Modules Module Settings Modules 112560 419560 2 2561 419561 HPRT 3 4 3 2562 419562 PRATS 512 4 2563 419563 STHA 13 14 5 2564 419564 THRS 15 22 6 2565 419565 PTC 23 24 7 2566 A19566 TCS 25 36 418068 Figure 71 1560 Black Stack settings Modules tab Select the module to view and or modify from the Modules list This list indi cates the module positions model numbers serial numbers module names and the range of channels on each module Click the Module Settings button to display the appropriate Module Settings di alog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected module are read in from the thermometer readout The Module Settings dialogs are described in detail in the following sections 2560 SPRT Module Settings Dialog The 2560 Module Settings dialog displays information about the 2560 module including model number serial number identification information and the 101 User s Guide 102 number of channels on this module It also allows many module specific set tings to be viewed and or modified 2560 Module Settings E r 2560 Module Settings Model Serial Identification Channels 2550 al 9560 SPAT 1 2560419560 2 General Channels Calibration Excitation current Resistance range fi m y a
88. 03 29 2010 3 21 56 PM 73 8237 03 29 2010 3 21 57 PM 73 8208 03 29 2010 3 21 58 PM 73 8214 03 29 2010 3 21 59 PM 73 8183 03 29 2010 3 22 00 PM 73 8176 03 29 2010 3 22 01 PM 73 8158 03 29 2010 3 22 02 PM 73 8192 03 29 2010 3 22 03 PM 73 8130 03 29 2010 3 22 04 PM 73 8155 ey Pay esj Pay rsg rsg Pag euj tay Prj Psg tay ey Psj ey esj Psj tsj Psg Pay tsj rey ray ray rey 03 29 2010 3 22 05 PM 73 8181 Low 03 29 2010 3 22 06 PM 73 8150 Low 03 29 2010 3 22 07 PM 73 8166 Low 03 29 2010 3 22 08 PM 73 8190 Low 03 29 2010 3 22 09 PM 73 8179 Low 03 29 2010 3 22 10 PM 73 8191 Low 03 29 2010 3 22 11 PM 73 8208 Low 03 29 2010 3 22 12 PM 73 8203 Low Figure 166 Output file example The output file contains a header indicating the filename thermometer readout and sessioin temperature scale information the channel name and alarm set tings if any The data is formatted into columns and consist of the date time reading value and alarm state Note If the output file was created using the Write all acquired data to the same file option the header of the output file will then contain infor mation for all enabled channels and an additional column is added to the file for the channel number for each reading This feature should typically only be used if you are using other software to sort and analyze the logged data The output file created when using this feature can still be opened by LogWare and displayed on screen however all readings are di
89. 133 User s Guide 134 4 4 3 14 1 LogWare has a feature that causes all of the channel settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the channel settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Probe tab Select the Probe tab to view and or modify probe settings Probe Probe serial number Edit onversion type gt Conversion Settings Conversion settings are passcode protected Figure 109 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings Probe tab The settings on the Probe tab may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the Probe tab and the Edit button is displayed The other controls on this tab are disabled except the Conversion Settings button If the selected conversion type does not have any settings this button should also be disabled To edit the probe settings click the Edit button and enter the cur rent passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the probe setting controls are enabled and the values may be changed The c
90. 2 ee 37 Trace color dialog sanini ue s ee ee 38 File Viewer WindoW oc cocco cedeu wae oe K a ea 39 Statistics diald08 se 2 ka Ree RHE rad 40 Previous Log Session window oaoa oaa e e 41 Channels popup Mea cca g ea e a e E aea a e 43 Graph pop p Me s o ay oa eca ta sypko a p oe EE a 44 Graph Zomig lis seco eR a a ada 45 Download Menu ocupo ca a a a a A S 47 Select Model dialog o o e 48 1523 Download Options dialog o o 50 1524 Download Options dialog o o 32 1529 Chub E4 Download Options dialog 54 1560 Black Stack Download Options dialog 55 1575A Super Thermometer Download Options dialog 57 1590 Super Thermometer II Download Options dialog 59 1523 Log Status dialog coe o see Ge Bk e a Semon 60 1524 Log Status dialog cs e s cas concor en 61 1529 Chub E4 Log Status dialog o 62 1560 Black Stack Log Status dialog 63 Ml AA BSS ONS oe nee Shee E 65 Select Model dialog 2 2 o o reditus eria 67 vii viii Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figur
91. 2 2002 10 26 32 20 3531 C DATA_04 11 02 2002 10 26 33 20 3534 C DATA_04 11 02 2002 10 26 34 20 3525 C DATA_04 11 02 2002 10 26 35 20 3536 C DATA_04 Figure 167 Download file example The download file contains a header indicating the filename thermometer read out model and channel optional The data is formatted into columns and con sist of the date time reading value label and or channel information Alarm Log File When a real time log session is started LogWare creates a file called alarms log This file is located in the Output folder by default The purpose of this file is to maintain a history of readings that caused the alarms to trip or reset The alarm log file can be viewed during a real time log session by selecting the Alarm Log menu option in the View menu or by right clicking on the Channels grid on the real time Log Session window and selecting the View Alarm Log option in the popup menu 231 User s Guide The following is an example of an alarm log file created by LogWare alarms log Alarm settings channel 1 Channel 1 Low Alarm 28 00 C High Alarm 30 00 c Channel 2 channel 2 Channel 3 channel 3 Date Time Name Alarm Reading 2 28 2002 10 49 38 Am channel 1 Low 25 59 C 2 28 2002 10 49 59 AM Channel 1 Reset 28 44 C 2 28 2002 10 50 14 am channel 1 High 30 04 C 2 28 2002 10 50 59 AM Channel 1 Reset 29 99 C Figure 168 Alarm log file example The alarm log file contains
92. 22 Low Range 239 240 Maximum 30 Mean 187 Measurement 88 100 142 153 Microsoft Excel 211 Min Max 187 Minimum 30 Misc 89 Module Settings 101 105 108 111 115 118 122 126 130 210 219 224 Mute All Alarms 16 Index N New 13 173 O Offset 253 Ohms 224 Open 18 29 41 43 173 240 242 247 250 252 254 Open Previously Logged Data File 33 41 179 229 231 Options 11 13 193 215 216 Order 188 Oven 145 156 P PT100 Settings 244 Polynomial Settings 246 Polynomial coefficients 246 Previous Log Session 40 Primary channel 100 Print 35 39 175 Print Graph 37 45 175 192 Print Setup 195 Probe Type 79 82 Probe selection 146 157 Q Query Channels 24 R RJC 83 95 Range 184 Readings History 35 37 179 196 Refres 61 Refresh 35 39 60 63 Remove Channel 43 Restore 37 45 46 191 Restore Default Settings 36 45 181 183 185 186 189 191 Right Title 182 S Sample timing 140 152 Sampling 73 74 87 99 140 151 Save As 14 17 29 174 240 242 244 246 247 251 252 254 Scan sequence delay 99 Scanner sequence mode 143 154 Select Model 47 48 53 55 57 58 62 63 65 67 71 209 215 218 219 221 222 Seq channels 143 154 Set as Default 208 Setup 15 17 18 175 195 Show Trace 34 36 43 44 179 Spread 30 Standard deviation 30 Statistics Settings 25 30 35 Std Dev 187 Step channel 143 154 Steps
93. 4 4 Thermometer Settings Dialogs for more information Importing logged data into a spreadsheet The data logged by LogWare is saved into ASCII text files referred to as output files These files can be opened and graphed by LogWare by selecting the Open Previously Logged Data File option in the View menu However these files may also be imported into spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel for graphing or analysis 6 How to Importing logged data into a spreadsheet To import an output file into Excel Note This example uses Microsoft Excel XP These steps may or may not apply if using a different version of Excel or another spreadsheet soft ware package 1 In Excel select the Open option in the File menu to display the Open dialog 2 In the Files of type box at the bottom of the open dialog select the Text Files prn txt csv option 3 Navigate to the folder where the output file is located Select the output file to open and click the Open button 4 The Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 dialog appears Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 i 2 x The Text Wizard has determined that your data is Delimited Tf this is correct choose Next or choose the data type that best describes your data riginal data type Choose the file type that best describes your data Delimited Characters such as commas or tabs separate each fi C Fixed width Fields are aligned in columns with spaces between each field
94. 49 68 261 C calibration constants 93 96 104 107 111 114 118 121 125 129 133 199 215 channel name 25 33 channels 7 24 31 41 42 73 75 85 88 97 102 103 105 106 108 110 112 113 115 117 119 120 122 123 127 128 130 132 137 138 143 149 154 Index clear 35 60 63 clock 65 192 206 214 close 16 32 39 40 62 176 coefficients 92 95 240 249 251 254 cold junction compensation 136 color palette 190 communication error 261 communications 4 16 configuration file 197 207 219 227 244 254 constants 93 96 104 107 111 114 118 121 125 129 133 145 156 conversion time 141 152 conversion type 80 83 91 95 134 136 148 159 224 228 D data files 227 229 date 93 96 104 107 111 114 118 121 125 133 date format 87 decimal format 87 default configuration file 18 194 default printer 195 234 237 delayed start 23 27 32 195 205 demand log 50 51 53 60 62 69 70 demo version 222 download 50 51 download files 40 51 53 58 179 231 233 235 236 download process 234 236 E error 259 261 event 28 29 excitation current 103 106 109 113 116 128 131 148 159 external reference resistor 145 156 F features 2 firmware requirements 5 firmware version 5 85 97 102 105 108 112 115 119 122 127 130 138 149 209 folders 197 front row wires 109 116 131 G getting s
95. 7 4 4 3 7 2562 PRTS Module Settings dialog o o ee ee 08 AAAA Generalia oei ae a dagas dde pica do Aa 109 AERLE Channels tab scada da A ia 110 A A ll A ee Naa oak ae hea loa Vayda lar Be Sp Raed aC aE A ETRA 110 44 3 8 2563 STHR Module Settings dialog 2 2 ee ee 11 ANS General tabs o osa aa cp deka Nis a EA a E 113 AAS 8 2 ChamelstaDs 0 sc icseupa a cad eget gd da ge dh aaa 113 AA3 8 3 Calibration tabs oa ea a ea be ad A ta Bok ols ea 114 44 3 9 2564 THRS Module Settings dialog ee ee ee 15 ARO Generali tabs is sc ms pri Sle ae Pasa Dak cor lorie 116 AA3Z OD Chamels tabla x 0 rca ae hte Sha ce sarees dhe ae BOW Bhasin a cata 117 ADS Calibtation tabs i cisco eu sae aug eases dc gD dares and 117 44 3 10 2565 PTC Module Settings dialog c raia 0 ee ee ee 18 4 4 3 10 1 Channels tabs summer OR ge RR RR a RE aa 120 AA3 10 2 Calibration tab scctece eae eb Rad Gee Bk REO Re tes ALS aa ee ee 121 4 4 3 2566 TCS Module Settings dialog lt soe ces a ra aie He Be e a Re A 22 AAS UIT Channels tabi ct o acetate title se beh acti Rak Gat aed Rs woe yeh Anse Sb eh Olga 123 FAST sCalibtation tabs A A degra BRE 124 44341210 Inputs T tO 6 tabi ec cece pa eb ek ee era 125 44 347 2 2 Inputs 7 to L2AGD gt lt ii cn Sa eb BROS he Bee 126 44 3 12 2567 RTD Module Settings dialog o o e eee 26 AAS ADT General tab ives ii a cde Sera cance assed has A Bd hp Ve B
96. 94A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Rs Settings dialog displays refer ence resistor information pertaining to the current channel selection Rs1 Settings Resistor Settings Cancel Resistor settings are passcode protected Help Edit Resistor ID Resistor Value Maximum Current Apply Calibration Date OK Calibration Due Figure 136 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Rs1 settings The settings on the Rs Settings dialog may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the dialog and the Edit button is displayed The controls on this dialog are disabled except the Resistor ID To edit the re sistor settings click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the ther mometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the controls are enabled and the values may be changed Select the resistor to be assigned to this Rs channel using the Resistor ID selec tion drop down list The Model 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer read out can hold information for up to 50 resistors Any one of these resistors can then be assigned to any Rs channel When a different resistor is selected the current settings for that resistor are read in from the thermometer readout A progress dialog is displayed while the probe settings are being read in After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If th
97. A Phone 1 801 763 1600 Toll Free 1 800 438 4278 Fax 1 801 763 1010 E mail supportOhartscientific com Fluke Nederland B V Customer Support Services Science Park Eindhoven 5108 5692 EC Son NETHERLANDS Phone 31 402 675300 Telefax 31 402 675321 E mail ServiceDesk fluke nl Fluke Int l Corporation Service Center Instrimpex Room 2301 Sciteck Tower 22 Jianguomenwai Dajie Chao Yang District Beijing 100004 PRC CHINA Phone 86 10 6 5 12 3436 257 User s Guide Telefax 86 10 6 512 3437 E mail xingye han fluke com cn Fluke South East Asia Pte Ltd Fluke ASEAN Regional Office Service Center 60 Alexandra Terrace 03 16 The Comtech Lobby D 118502 SINGAPORE Phone 65 737 2922 Telefax 65 737 5155 E mail antng singa fluke com Check our website on the Internet regularly for answers to Frequently Asked Questions software updates and Service Releases Before calling for Technical Support check the Help file or User Guide topics listed below to see if the problem you are having is described there e Requirements e Installation e Running Log Ware e How dol topics When calling or sending a fax please send or have the following information ready e Name of Software Log Ware II e Software version and build as found on the About Log Ware dialog e Detailed description of the problem e What you were doing when the problem arose e The exact wording of any error message you re
98. Black Stack Download Options dialog is displayed 1560 Black Stack Download Options a 1560 Black Stack Download Options Select communication device Use base serial port y m Readings Download all readings from history log e Download last n readings from history log 50o H d readings Resolution a H digits r Files Write all readings into a single file Separate readings by channel EES J Prompt to enter filename s Ph Figure 32 1560 Black Stack Download Options dialog The Select communication device setting determines the device serial port to which the readings will be downloaded e Use base serial port Select this option if the serial cable is connected to the serial port on the base unit of the 1560 immediately behind the dis play e Use communication module serial port Select this option if the serial cable is connected to the serial port on the Model 3560 Communication Module 55 User s Guide 56 The Readings section allows the number of readings to be downloaded to be specified The history log can contain up to 1 000 readings Note The actual number of readings in the history log depends on the number of channels on the thermometer readout Typically the history log can hold 1 000 readings as long as there are not more than 63 total input channels on the thermometer readout For every channel over 63 the num ber of readings that the histo
99. If the Prompt to enter filename s check box is checked a prompt is displayed after the data is downloaded for each file that needs to be created depending on the other selections above If this option is not checked the default filenames are used After selecting the appropriate options on this dialog click the Download but ton to start the download process For more details on the download process please refer to Section 8 Download Process To close this dialog click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 1529 Chub E4 download options dialog The Model 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout including models 1529 1529 R and 1529 T can store readings in any of two logs demand log and auto log LogWare can download the readings from these logs and write the readings into download files For more information on download files please refer to Section 7 2 2 Download File When the Download Logged Data option in the Download menu is selected and the 1529 thermometer readout is selected on the Select Model dialog the 1529 Chub E4 Download Options dialog is dis played Figure 31 The Select log to download section allows the log to be specified The 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout has two logs demand log and auto log The de mand log stores up to 100 readings while the auto log stores up to 8 160 read ings For more details on the demand and auto logs see the 1529 Chub E4 Thermomet
100. Inverse 4 y x a x b Inverse 5 y 1 a b x 2 Spline Spline fit through all points Moving Average Mid Moving average plotted at midpoint of averaged group Moving Average End Moving average plotted at end point of averaged group 187 User s Guide The Order option applies only to three curve types e For variable order polynomial curves Order is the order of the polyno mial used in curve fitting A setting of 1 produces a straight line the same as a best fit line a setting one less than the number of points produces a curve that passes through every point e For moving average mid and moving average end curves Order is the range of data points over which moving averages are averaged beginning with the first point The Granularity scroll bar sets the granularity of all curve types except mov ing average The granularity is the number of steps or straight line segments making up the curve Higher values create smoother curves but require more drawing time The default Granularity setting is 50 curve steps which generally creates a smooth looking curve at a high drawing speed Each click to the left decreases the number of steps by 2 to a minimum of 10 and each click to the right increases the number of steps by 2 to a maximum of 1000 With spline curves you generally need higher granularities than normal up to 10 times the number of points in the graph Select the colors for each of the statistical lines to d
101. L OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IM PLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE HART SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCI DENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS WHETHER IN CON TRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE Microsoft MS DOS Windows Window for Workgroups and Windows 95 98 ME NT 2000 XP and VISTA are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Fluke Corporation Hart Scientific Division 799 E Utah Valley Drive American Fork UT 84003 9775 USA Phone 1 801 763 1600 Telefax 1 801 763 1010 Email supportO hartscientific com www hartscientific com Subject to change without notice Copyright O 2008 Printed in USA Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 LS 1 6 1 7 1 8 What is LogWare c e ccs sudes ee 1 License Agres ment lt br es a dS a Soe Oe 2 Beauties wit See er GS eee di de aa 2 Requirements is 3 fe box OM ROH Ale POR ee Bae eee ee 4 1 4 1 Communications requirements sis oe dopen ea 0 00 00 00 4 1 4 2 Computer hardware requirements 0000000 ee eee 4 1 4 3 Computer software requirements 0002000000 eae 5 1 4 4 Firmware requirements 2 2 ee 5 Installation lt 2 i bees bees Sb bee YEE eS eS 6 Running LogWare o ee ee Ee 6 1 6 1 Getting started cc sb sews d aoe Hop sewed 3 era RS Rew a a ga Re e 6 Using L
102. No readings in memory or selected log See Communication Problems above Make sure the memory or selected log has one or more readings in it 260 10 Troubleshooting Communication error 10 3 Communication error If LogWare is unable to communicate with the thermometer readout for any reason a communication error occurs To resolve the communication error please check the following If you are using an RS 232 cable Is the COM port in use Make sure that the COM port is not currently being used by another application If there is a hot sync adapter for a PDA connected to your computer make sure the software that uses the adapter 1s closed or that it is not trying to use the same COM port Is the correct COM port selected Make sure that the communication cable is connected to the selected COM port on the computer Is the thermometer readout set to the right baud rate Make sure that the thermometer readout s baud rate matches the baud rate selected in Log Ware Refer to the thermometer readout s User s Guide for more de tails on how to set the thermometer readout s baud rate Is the right type of cable being used LogWare requires that a null mo dem cable be used to communicate with thermometer readouts Refer to the Digital Communication section of the thermometer readout s User s Guide for more details on the correct type of cable to use Is the thermometer readout turned on Make
103. R 1529 T Chub E4 Thermometer readouts 1560 Black Stack Thermometer readout 2560 SPRT Module 2561 HTPRT Module 2562 PRTS Module 2563 STHR Module 2564 THRS Module 2565 PTC Module 2566 TCS Module 2567 RTD Module 2568 RTDS Module 3560 Communication Module 1575 Super Thermometer readout real time logging only 2575 Mighty Mux Multiplexer 1575A Super Thermometer readout 2575 Mighty Mux Multiplexer 1590 Super Thermometer II readout Up to five 2590 Mighty Mux II Multiplexers 1594A 1595A Super Thermometer Readout Up to 2 Model 2590 Mighty Mux II Multiplexers LogWare also provides utilities for Downloading data that has been logged to the thermometer readout s logs or memory Setting logging labels in the thermometer readout for thermometer read outs that support this feature Synchronizing thermometer readout s clock to the computer s clock User s Guide 1 2 1 3 e Viewing and editing many thermometer readout module and probe set tings including probe coefficients This manual is intended to document the use and features of LogWare To en sure correct results verify that the thermometer readout is properly configured before collecting data Refer to the individual thermometer readout s User s Guide for specifics pertaining to the instrument Follow all warnings and cau tions documented in the readout s User s Guide License agreement For information and
104. R Module Settings Channels tab Select the channel to view and or modify from the Channels list This list indi cates the channel number with respect to this module and the serial number of the probe on each channel 113 User s Guide 114 4 4 3 8 3 Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate channel settings di alog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel are read in from the thermometer readout The Channel Settings dialog is described in detail in Section 4 4 3 14 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings Dialog Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify module calibration informa tion General Channels Calibration WARNING Changing these values voids the module calibration Calibration parameters are passcode protected Figure 87 2563 STHR Module Settings Calibration tab The settings on the Calibration tab may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the Calibration tab and the Edit button is dis played The other controls on this tab are disabled To edit the calibration pa rameters click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the calibration parame ter controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Ap
105. Scanner 3 5 Scanner 4 y Figure 123 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings Measurement tab Use the Channel mode drop down list to select the channels to take measure ments from The channel mode can be set to one of the following options e Alternate input 1 input 2 e Input e Input 2 e Scanner channel only if Model 2590 Mighty Mux II Multiplexer s is are connected e Scanner sequence only if Model 2590 Mighty Mux IT Multiplexer s is are connected If the channel mode is set to Alternate Input 1 Input 2 Input 1 or Input 2 the scanner channel and scanner sequence mode settings are not applicable and are disabled If the channel mode is set to Scanner channel the Scanner channel setting is enabled If the channel mode is set to Scanner sequence the scanner sequence mode setting is enabled 153 User s Guide 154 4 4 5 4 Enter the repetitions setting in the Repetitions box provided or use the up down buttons The repetitions can be set to any value between 1 and 32 000 readings If the channel mode is set to Scanner channel select the scanner channel to ac tivate using the Scanner channel drop down list If the channel mode is set to Scanner sequence select the scanner sequence mode using the Scanner sequence mode drop down list The scanner sequence mode can be set to on of the following options e Scanner channels only Input 2 and scanner channels Alternate input 2 scanner channels A
106. Test Com munication button to make sure Log Ware can communicate with the ther mometer readout Log session e Select the interval between readings e Optional Enable and select the interval between scan sequences e To set a delayed start date time click the Delayed Start button and choose the appropriate date and time for the log session to start Otherwise the log session will begin when the Start button is clicked e Choose the appropriate end log session option and set the other end log settings as required Channels e Query the channels from the thermometer readout by clicking the Query Channels button User s Guide 1 7 e Enable or disable each channel as needed by selecting each channel in the Channels list and checking or unchecking the Acquire data from this channel box e Optional To customize the statistical data for each channel click the Statistics Settings button e Optional To configure alarms for each channel click the Alarm Settings button e Enter the channel name output filename and select the trace color for each channel These settings can be saved to a configuration file by clicking the Save As but ton To open the current configuration file every time the software runs click the Set as Default button After entering this information click the Start button to start the real time log session Using Log Ware The following sections describe some of the main features of LogWare
107. a feature which allows a log session configuration file to be de fined as the default configuration file The default configuration file is automat ically loaded every time LogWare is started To set the current configuration as the default configuration select the Set as Default button If the current config uration has not been saved yet a prompt is displayed indicating that the config uration must be saved to a file before it can be set as the default The next time LogWare is started the default configuration file will be loaded Note Real time log session configuration files contain information about the current thermometer readout configuration If the thermometer read out configuration changes the configuration file needs to be updated also Once the log session settings are complete click the Start button to start a log session Please refer to Section 2 4 Real Time Log Session for more details on a real time log session If the log session does not need to be started yet click the Close button The Log Session Settings dialog is closed but all settings are retained To display the Log Session Settings dialog again select the Setup option in the Datalog menu or click the ES button on the toolbar 2 Real time logging Log session settings dialog 2 3 1 Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog Thermometer tab The Thermometer tab allows the thermometer readout that will be used to
108. a files containing more than one data set up to a maximum of 10 data sets can now be opened Version 1 1 A list of features and enhancements in Version 1 1 follows e Simultaneous Logging of All Channels in Real Time A feature has been added to allow readings to be taken on all enabled channels of a real time log session simultaneously as fast as possible User s Guide 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 2 e Download Logged Data from Serial Port on 3560 Communication Module A feature has been added to allow logged readings to be down loaded to the serial port on the Model 3560 Communication Module on a Model 1560 Black Stack thermometer readout e Write All Real Time Data to a Single File A new feature has been added to allow data from all channels of a real time log session to be writ ten to the same output file In these output files a new column has been added for the channel number A Note Although Log Ware is still able to open these files it does not sepa rate the data for each channel All readings are plotted on the graph as if all data was from a single channel e Branding Logo change The logos and graphics displayed in Log Ware have been updated Also various features have been added to the software to aid in troubleshooting issues related to real time log sessions and downloading logged data Requirements LogWare is designed to work with Hart Scientific s multi channel digital ther mometer readouts Refer to
109. a header indicating the filename and alarm settings for all enabled channels The data is formatted into columns and consist of the date time channel name alarm state and reading value 232 process 8 Download process 1523 1524 Handheld and 1529 Chub E4 download 8 1 Download process The following sections describe in detail the download process for each of the thermometer readouts supported by LogWare 1523 1524 Handheld and 1529 Chub E4 download process The download process for the 1523 1524 Handheld and 1529 Chub E4 Ther mometer readouts consists of 3 main steps 1 Download the data from the thermometer readout 2 Parse the data 3 Write the data to download file s When the download process starts a progress dialog appears to indicate the download progress To abort downloading the data from the thermometer read out click the Cancel button on the progress dialog If the Prompt to enter filename s option was selected the Windows Save As dialog is displayed to get the name of the file s that the data should be saved to once all of the data has been downloaded The Download folder should be se lected by default or the folder that is specified for download files on the LogWare Options dialog e If the Write all readings into a single file option was selected all readings will be written to the specified file By default the filename is down load txt e If the Separate readings by channel opti
110. ad Logged Data option in the Download menu 2 The Select Model dialog is displayed Select the thermometer readout model Also select the COM port to which the thermometer readout is connected and the baud rate to use Make sure Log Ware can communi 6 How to Saving probe coefficients to a configuration file 6 12 cate with the thermometer readout by clicking the Test Communication button Click the OK button when communication is successful 3 The Download Options dialog is displayed This dialog is specific to the selected thermometer readout 4 Select the appropriate download options and click the Download button to download the readings 5 Click the Close button to close the Download Options dialog when finished Please refer to Section 3 Downloading Logged Data for more information Saving probe coefficients to a configuration file LogWare provides a feature that allows probe coefficients to be saved to a con figuration file To save probe coefficients to a configuration file 1 Select the Thermometer Settings option in the Tools menu 2 The Select Model dialog is displayed Select the thermometer readout model Also select the COM port where the thermometer readout is con nected and the baud rate to use Make sure Log Ware can communicate with the thermometer readout by clicking the Test Communication but ton Click the OK button when communication is successful 3 The thermometer readout settings are the
111. age Response time Threshhold 2 D 2 0000 Figure 113 1575A Super Thermometer Settings Filtering tab Use the Filter type drop down list to select the type of filtering to use The filter type can be set to one of the following options e None e Average e Exponential If the filter type is set to None the Response time and Threshold settings are not applicable and are disabled If the filter type is set to Average or Exponen tial the Response time and Threshold settings are enabled Enter the response time for the filter in the Response time box The response time can be set to any value between 2 and 200 seconds Enter the threshold to use for the selected filter in the Threshold box The threshold can be set to any value between 0001 and 1 000 000 139 User s Guide 4 4 4 2 Sampling tab Select the Sampling tab to view and or modify sampling settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Calibration Unit Sample action Sample n C z Run y fi Sample timing Sample interval Integration time Conversion time E Resolutions Temperature Resistance Ratio f p FE 3 Some sampling settings are passcode protected Figure 114 1575A Super Thermometer Settings Sampling tab Select the units using the Units drop down list Readings can be displayed in either C F K Ohms Ratio or W Note This setting may override the selected conversion type for each channel Plea
112. ake its first reading at the selected date and time However LogWare may or may not be able to do so depending on the processor speed of the com puter amount of available memory free hard disk space other running applications etc Please refer to Section 2 Real Time Logging for more information Stopping a real time log session automatically The main purpose of Log Ware is to perform real time data acquisition Many times the technician is present when a log session needs to be stopped How ever sometimes it is necessary or desirable to stop a real time log session when the technician is busy with another task or at off hours when the technician is out The End Log feature of LogWare provides three methods for stopping a real time log session e By user e After specified number of readings 6 How to Opening a configuration file automatically on start up e After specified time elapses The first method By user is the default setting To stop the real time log session automatically 1 Select the Setup option in the Datalog menu The Log Session Settings dialog is displayed Select the Log Session tab gt a Select the method to use to stop the real time log session using the End log drop down list e By user Log session stops when the Stop option in the Datalog menu is selected e After specified number of readings Log session stops automatically when number of readings specified have been acquired
113. alog is dis played The Config folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for configuration files on the LogWare Options dialog Real time log session configuration files are saved with a rls extension To cancel saving a configuration file click the Cancel button Otherwise enter the filename for the configuration file and click the Save button For more details about the real time log session configuration file refer to Section 7 1 1 Log Session Configuration File Real time log session configuration files can also be saved by clicking the Save As button on the Log Session Settings dialog 2 Real time logging Datalog menu 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 Datalog menu The Datalog menu is used to access the Log Session Settings dialog to start stop and close the real time log session and to mute audible alarms Mute All Alarms Figure 8 Datalog Menu Setup The Setup option displays the Log Session Settings dialog This dialog is used to configure a real time log session If a log session has already been config ured or a real time log session configuration file has already been opened this dialog displays the current log session settings The va button on the toolbar corresponds to the Setup menu option Please refer to Section 2 3 Log Session Settings Dialog for more details on configuring a real time log session Start The Start option starts a real time log session This option is d
114. alues are between 2 and 100 If the Dig ital Filter Enable is Off this settings is not applicable and is disabled Display tab Select the Display tab to view and or modify display settings Filterina Display Timing Scanning Channel Setup Temperature Unit e y Temperature Resolution 3 Figure 130 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Display tab Select the units using the Units drop down list Readings can be displayed in either C F or K Note This setting may be overridden depending on the selected probe conversion type and channel settings for each channel Please refer to the thermometer readout s User s Guide for more information on setting the system units Enter the resolution for temperature readings in the Temperature Resolution box provided or click the up down buttons The temperature resolution can be set to any value between 0 and 6 digits places after decimal point 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 6 3 4 4 6 3 Timing tab Select the Timing tab to view and or modify timing settings Filtering Display Timing Scanning Channel Setup Sample Period Display Interval Average Enable On Stop Timer Enable Off A Timer Duration 01 00 00 Timing settings are passcode protected Figure 131 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Timing tab Use the Sample Period drop down list to select the length of time required to obtain an individual measurement Possible values ar
115. ame box MUST exist When the OK button is clicked a search is performed to locate the file If the file is not found a warning message is displayed If the selected file resides on a network resource the resource must be available and properly connected when the alarm event occurs LogWare ships with a few sample WAV files that can be used These files are located in the Config folder The Launch EXE file indicated below option can be used to launch any appli cation such as pager software which could be configured to dial a phone num ber automatically and transmit a fixed message to a pager indicating that an alarm has tripped 2 Real time logging Log session settings dialog A Note It is not recommended that the Launch EXE file indicated below option be used especially in conjunction with the After every update op tion until the user is familiar with how this feature works Unless the EXE file terminates itself automatically or is limited to a single in stance this software will continue to launch new instances of the EXE file every time the alarm trips possibly causing the computer to run out of resources Select when the specified event for each alarm should occur The choices are e Only once when the alarm value is exceeded e After every update If the Only once when the alarm value is exceeded option is selected the cho sen event will occur on the first reading that trips the alarm Subsequent read ings th
116. and 100 The Scanner sequence list indicates the current channel assignments for each step in the user defined scanner sequence To change the current channel as signed to a step select the step in the list The current channel assignment ap pears in the Step channel control Select the channel assignment for the currently selected step using the Step Channel drop down list Channels tab Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels on the 1575A Super Ther 143 User s Guide 144 mometer readout and to access the channel settings dialogs to view and or modify channel specific settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Calibration Channel Settings Channels Scanner 1 Probe 3 Scanner 2 Probe 4 Scanner 3 Probe 5 Scanner 4 Probe 6 Scanner 5 Probe 7 Scanner 6 Probe 8 Scanner 7 Probe 9 Scanner 8 Probe 10 Scanner 9 Probe 11 Scanner 10 Probe 12 Figure 116 1575A Super Thermometer Settings Channels tab Select the channel to view and or modify from the Channels list This list indi cates the channel number and the current probe that is assigned to each channel Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate channel settings di alog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel are read in from the thermometer readout The Channel Settings dialog is described in detail in Section 4 4 4 6 1575A Super Thermometer 2575 Mighty Mux
117. and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the channel settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Probe tab Select the Probe tab to view and or modify probe settings Probe Misc Probe serial number Calibration date aset 230 8 72172008 y Probe Type Tc y Conversion type Thermocouple Type Conversion Settings RJC type RJC temperature Y ES E External 23 000 G Figure 53 1523 1524 Thermocouple Channel Settings Probe tab Enter the serial number of the probe attached to this channel in the probe serial number box The serial number can be any combination of numbers and or let ters up to 8 characters in length The underscore _ character can also be used in serial numbers Select the date this probe was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for the probe Select the appropriate probe type for this probe using the Probe Type drop down list Currently the only choice is TC 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs Select the conversion type to use for the probe on this c
118. annel and select the Trace Color option in the popup menu or by select ing the Trace Color option in the Graph menu The Trace Color dialog is dis played Please refer to Section 2 4 7 Trace Color Dialog for more information on this dialog The Show Trace option in the popup menu indicates whether the trace for the selected channel is currently shown on the graph A check appears next to this option if the trace is visible The trace on the graph for any channel can be tog gled on or off at any time To toggle the trace for any channel select the tab for the channel and select the Show Trace option in the popup menu or select the Show trace option in the View menu If a check appears next to this option the trace is currently shown If no check appears the trace is hidden Statistics list The Statistics list is located in the upper right corner of the Previous Log Ses sion window and displays statistical information for the currently selected channel The statistics are calculated when the data is read in from the file The color of the statistics data matches the trace color for the selected channel 43 User s Guide 44 2 5 3 Each of the statistical settings can be enabled or disabled by clicking the Set tings button Only the enabled statistics are displayed in the Statistics list Please refer to Section 2 3 6 Statistics Settings Dialog for more information on the Statistics Settings dialog Graph The graph is loc
119. ased on all readings since the last reset was performed Once the statistics settings are complete click the OK button to save these set tings and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 2 Real time logging Real time log session 2 4 Real time log session The Log Session window is displayed when a real time log session starts This window is divided into three main sections channels grid statistics and graph These three sections can be resized by dragging the bars that divide the sections with the mouse A ll m Channels r Statistics a ae oe Standard deviation 4 62761 F Settings Clear F or value 70 0000 boat 13 08 10 13 18 10 13 28 10 13 38 10 13 48 10 Time Figure 16 Real time log session window LogWare was designed to communicate with only one thermometer readout at a time Therefore only one real time log session can be running at a time In or der to optimize data acquisition many menu options are disabled during a real time log session When a log session is started LogWare prepares to acquire data from the en abled channels The current conversion settings for each channel and system units are determined at this time The scale of the readings for each channel de pends on the conve
120. at also exceed the alarm value will not cause the event to occur again until one or more readings are taken that are back within the alarm value alarm reset If the After every update option is selected every reading that is taken that ex ceeds the alarm value causes the event to happen again The alarm settings can be saved to a configuration file If the same alarm set tings are to be used on multiple channels this provides a method to quickly configure the alarms on subsequent channels When clicking the Save As button the Windows Save As dialog is displayed The Config folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for configuration files on the LogWare Options dialog Alarm configuration files are saved with a alm extension To cancel saving a configuration file click the Cancel button Otherwise enter the filename for the configuration file and click the Save button For more details about the alarm configuration file refer to Section 7 1 2 Alarm Configuration File An alarm configuration file that has been saved previously can be opened by clicking the Open button When clicking the Open button the Windows Open dialog is displayed The Config folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for configuration files on the LogWare Options dialog Alarm configuration files should have a alm extension To cancel opening a configuration file click the Cancel button Otherwise
121. ated at the bottom of the Previous Log Session window The graph gives a visual representation of the readings on all channels The trace for each channel can be toggled on or off To show or hide the trace for the selected channel right click on the tab in the Channels grid and select the Show Trace option in the popup menu or select the Show Trace option in the View menu The Y axis of the graph is automatically scaled to display all visible traces in their entirety The Y axis is labeled Value by default and the resolution of the values is extracted from the data read in from the channels The X axis of the graph grows automatically to display the entire trace of the channel with the most readings The X axis is labeled Readings by default and is numbered ac cording to the number of readings in each file Note The graph allows a maximum of 32 767 readings per channel If any one file contains more readings than that the first 32 767 readings are read in and the rest are ignored The graph also limits the total number of data points to 128 000 for all channels So for 10 channels a maximum of 12 800 readings per channel can be displayed Gridlines can be automatically displayed on the graph by checking the show gridlines on graphs option of the General tab of the LogWare Options dialog Please refer to Section 5 6 4 1 General Tab for more details Right clicking on the graph displays a popup menu This menu is identical to the Graph m
122. ation pertaining to the current channel selection Channel 1 Settings m Channel 1 Settings Reference Sensing Current Apply to OK MES MEM Help Standby Current On E Calculation Temperature Me Rs Inuput Settings Figure 135 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Channel settings Cancel After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings To close this dialog without writing the channel settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Use the Reference drop down list to select the reference resistor for the se lected channel Possible internal reference resistor values are 1 ohm 10 ohm 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 25 ohm 100 ohm and 10 000 ohm In addition an external reference resistor connected to Rs1 Rs2 CH2 or CH4 can be selected Sensing Current Sensing Current the sensing current used with the channel and probe Possible values depend on the reference resistor selected e 1 ohm and 10 ohm internal reference can have the sensing current set to any value between 0 0001 and 20 0 mA e 25 ohm internal reference can have the sensing current set to any value be
123. ation settings must be properly configured so that this information can be read in from the thermometer readout If communica tion with the thermometer readout is not successful an error message is dis played and this dialog is blank A progress dialog is displayed while the current thermometer readout settings are being read in 137 User s Guide 138 The Model box indicates the model number of the thermometer readout The Identification box indicates the model number and firmware version installed in this thermometer readout The Channels box indicates the total number of input channels on this thermometer readout The filtering settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the Filtering tab The sampling settings can be viewed and or modified by selecting the Sam pling tab The measurement settings can be viewed and or modified by select ing the Measurement tab The Channels tab displays a list of channels and allows access to channel settings dialogs The thermometer readout calibration information can be viewed and or modified by selecting the Calibration tab The settings on each of these tabs are described in detail in the following sec tions For more details on these settings please refer to the thermometer read out s User s Guide If any of the settings on the 1575A Super Thermometer Settings dialog are passcode protected a message appears at the bottom of the appropriate tab and the Edit button is displayed The c
124. b The Channels tab displays a list of the channels on this module and allows access to channel settings dialogs The module calibration information can be viewed and modified by selecting the Calibration tab After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new module settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dia log closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the module settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options 105 User s Guide 106 4 4 3 6 1 4 4 3 6 2 To close this dialog without writing the module settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog General tab Select the General tab to view and or modify general module settings General l Channels Calibration Excitation current 3 ma Figure 77 2561 HPRT Module Settings General tab Select the excitation current for this module using the Excitation current drop down list The 2561 module can use either a 3 mA or a5
125. bbe Pee A RA die dE a eA he oe o 176 5 2 5 Mute all alarms i nese ce ae RHE TEER ESE SO we HE 176 Download menu s si s 40a 2 ea a Ya eA Mee 177 5 3 1 Download logged data s io scs br ete o a oea a ee 177 5 3 2 LOS SAS a vir dido Oa Me GSH RS 177 VIEW MENU ua da Fey eh aks es eee a ae we a 178 5 4 1 Toolbars 4 44 5 2628 ob Oak oe ea BERS ba SES oS 178 5 4 2 Status Dit iaa State SMe aoe Ras Ee Bowl at Pate e at dela dee A 178 5 4 3 Alarar SEU ES y 4 4 due Oe ds bo hoe ot dot de and MS ee he A ea WS 178 5 4 4 SHOW Hades iG sos di oa Bk WO eae a ee FG a Bae Bh ee 179 5 4 5 Alarm 10S kid Re Ago a A we A Nala i Bos 179 5 4 6 Readings HIStory ce esse HER SPADES ee EEE as 179 5 4 7 Open previously logged data file o o oo o 179 5 4 8 MRO TiS e bi a ds a eek eee Ge 179 Graph me ee we Sale a eee es 180 5 5 1 Graph settings dialog ste sis aat toesea e Be ela te Wia ww ee 180 LA Titles tabin ci cs gave oe wee eee E we apt a ee aes Gee 180 Del Ds ANRISHAD Ae cet ote Sg sep Hae nak BAe Bee Pte ae ee Sha Se Bede at doe Regie Beek 183 S513 Fonts aD s 25 essa ca ee he RARE RAR Re BRE a ea ee 185 SLA TEMAS soa si6 dor a dow bel Gg ae SAE aoe Gb aha a cig aE a 186 5 9 13 Background tab as gus dye ee Steere gah Boe S38 obs we ERS aes TERE Bw 189 IO Le gendtab s tices hes tad A GOs Be ee Bop Pl oe Goi Hee E A 190 5 3 2 Restore default settings sr se aE AE OR eta EE Hw 191 5 53 Trace COMO a e Wi eah A aca TE is 191 5 5 4 LOMA
126. bled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button Caution Do not change these values unless this module has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values located on the latest Report of Calibration for this module Changing these values voids the current calibration Select the date this module was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module Enter the values for the calibration constants in the boxes provided The cali bration constants required by the 2564 module are 0 ADJ 10K ADJ and 100K ADJ The values of these constants should be located on the Report of Calibra tion for this module 2565 PTC Module Settings dialog The 2565 Module Settings dialog displays information about the 2565 module including model number serial number identification information and the 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs number of channels on this module It also allows many module specific set tings to be viewed and or modified 2565 Module Settings m 2565 Module Settings Model Serial Identification Channels 2565 faa 9565 PTC 1 2565 419565 2 Channels l Calibration Channels Channel Settings 2 963258 Figure 92 2565 PTC Module Settings dialog Cancel MES Help The Model box indicates the model number of this module
127. box indicates the current name for this label Enter the new name for the demand log label After the label has been modified as needed click the OK button to write the new label name to the thermometer readout A progress dialog is displayed while the new label name is being written to the thermometer readout If the label was not modified or to close this dialog without writing the new la bel name to the thermometer readout click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 69 User s Guide 70 4 3 2 1524 Handheld logging labels dialog The Model 1524 Handheld Thermometer readout can store readings into logs When readings are stored in a log a label can be assigned to each reading or set of readings to indicate the reason purpose or to otherwise identify the read ing s LogWare provides a tool that can be used to view and or modify the cur rent logging label settings When the Logging Labels option in the Tools menu is selected and the 1524 Thermometer readout is selected on the Select Model dialog the 1524 Logging Labels dialog is displayed 1524 Logging Labels 1524 Demand Log Label Reset All Label name DEMAND 1524 Auto Log Labels Label name Labels DATA_1 Apply gt Cancel Help do Figure 42 1524 Logging Labels dialog When the 1524 Logging Labels dialog is displayed all of the current label names a
128. bration for the probe attached to this channel for in formation on the conversion type that the probe was calibrated for 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 4 If the selected conversion type requires coefficients or other settings the Con version Settings button is enabled Click the Conversion Settings button to dis play the dialog for the selected conversion type Otherwise the Conversion Settings button is disabled Please refer to Section 9 Conversion Settings Dialogs for a detailed description of the Conversion Settings dialogs Note The conversion settings are not written to the thermometer readout until the Apply or OK button is clicked on this dialog 1575A Super Thermometer Settings The 1575A Super Thermometer Settings dialog displays information about the thermometer readout including model number identification information and the total number of channels It also allows many thermometer readout settings to be viewed and or modified 15754 Super Thermometer Settings 3 15754 Super Thermometer Settings Model Identification Channels j 5754 j 5754 5 03N fi 2 Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Calibration Filter type Average z Response time Threshhold 2 0 2 0000 UA Cancel Help Figure 112 1575A Super Thermometer Settings dialog The 1575A Super Thermometer readout must be connected to an available COM port and the communic
129. built in passcode protection for calibration parameters and or probe conversion settings including probe characterization coefficients These settings are typically pro tected because altering their values changes the calibration and or readout accu racy of the thermometer readout Some thermometer readouts however lack this protection LogWare includes a feature that allows these settings to be passcode protected for thermometer readouts that do not inherently include this protection using an administrator passcode to prevent unauthorized users from changing the cur rent values To protect calibration parameters and probe conversion settings 1 Select the Options option in the Tools menu 2 The LogWare Options dialog is displayed 3 Select the Tools tab The Tools tab contains options that pertain to the thermometer settings dialogs 4 Inthe Passcode Protection section there are two options e Protect probe conversion settings e Protect calibration parameters Note If these settings are disabled an administrator passcode has been setup The administrator passcode is required to change these settings For more information on gaining access to the options protected by the admin istrator passcode see Section 6 9 Setting up an administrator passcode 215 User s Guide 216 A Note The administrator passcode in LogWare is completely independent of the thermometer readout passcodes The administrator passcode is use
130. ceived e Any other information that may help to solve the problem 258 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting common problems 10 2 Troubleshooting common problems The following table outlines some possible problems that may arise when using LogWare and some possible solutions to those problems Table 1 Troubleshooting Common Problems Problem Possible Cause Solution Communication Problems Cannot select correct COM port Unable to communicate with thermometer readout using RS 232 cable Unable to communicate with thermometer readout using IR dongle Another application is using the COM port COM port is not enabled or configured correctly Wrong COM port selected Wrong type of RS 232 cable being used Wrong baud rate setting Bad RS 232 cable Thermometer readout is not turned on Wrong COM port selected Incompatible IR dongle being used Built in IR port being used Obstructed path between IR dongle and IR window on thermometer readout Distance between IR dongle and IR window too great Close all other applications that use COM ports including Hot Sync manager modem software etc Use Windows Device Manager to check COM port settings Make sure the RS 232 cable is connected to the correct COM port Make sure the RS 232 cable is a null mo dem cable Make sure the thermometer readout is set to the correct baud rate Try using another RS 232 cable Connect power to ther
131. channel When a new probe is selected the current settings for that probe are read in from the thermometer readout A progress dialog is displayed while the probe settings are being read in After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 4 6 1 LogWare has a feature that causes all of the channel settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the channel settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Probe tab Select the Probe tab to view and or modify probe settings Probe Probe serial number 362354 Reference Current IW offset 100 Ohm y 1 4140 0 000000 Conversion type ITS 90 z Conversion Settings Figure 119 1575A Super Thermometer 2575 Mighty Mux Channel Settings Probe tab Enter the serial number of the selected probe in
132. clicking on the graph and selecting the Zoom In option in the popup menu or by click ing the El button on the toolbar When the zoom feature is enabled the mouse pointer turns into a crosshair when positioned over the graph the toolbar button remains depressed and a check mark appears next to the Zoom In option indicating that the graph is now in zoom mode 50 000 45 000 A 40 000 35 000 20013 PM 12 01 03PM 12 01 53PM 12 02 43PM 12 03 33 PM Time Figure 26 Graph zooming To zoom in to a portion of the graph use the mouse to select the portion of the graph to zoom by clicking the left mouse button and holding it down while dragging the mouse to draw a rectangular box around the desired area Releas 45 User s Guide 46 ing the mouse button causes the graph to zoom in to the selected area Repeat this process to zoom in closer and closer To restore the graph to its normal state select the Restore option in the Graph menu or right click on the graph and select the Restore option in the popup menu or click the gt button on the toolbar The check mark is then re moved in the Zoom In option and the Zoom In toolbar button no longer appears depressed 3 Downloading logged data Download menu 3 1 3 1 2 Downloading logged data LogWare provides tools to download data that has been logged to the thermom eter readout s memory or logs and to view the current status of the thermometer readou
133. clock to the computer The thermometer readouts supported by Log Ware have an internal clock LogWare provides a utility to synchronize the thermometer readout s clock with the clock on the computer Note LogWare itself does not use the clock on the thermometer readout at all All dates and times associated with readings acquired by LogWare use the computer s clock Before synchronizing the thermometer readout s clock make sure the com puter s clock is accurate Use the Windows Control Panel to adjust the date and time as necessary To synchronize the thermometer readout s clock with the computer s clock Select the Synchronize Date Time option in the Tools menu or click the 3 button on the toolbar settings 6 How to Protecting calibration parameters and probe conversion 6 8 2 The Select Model dialog is displayed Select the thermometer readout model Also select the COM port to which the thermometer readout is connected and the baud rate to use Make sure Log Ware can communi cate with the thermometer readout by clicking the Test Communication button Click the OK button when communication is successful 3 LogWare attempts to set the thermometer readout s clock to match the clock on the computer Please refer to Section 4 1 1 Synchronize Date Time for more information Protecting calibration parameters and probe conversion settings Some of the thermometer readouts supported by LogWare have
134. communication debugging Figure 150 LogWare Options General tab The Show Log Session Settings dialog on start up option causes LogWare to automatically display the Log Session Settings dialog every time Log Ware starts up If checked the Log Session Settings dialog is displayed immediately after LogWare starts up If not checked LogWare does not display the Log Ses sion Settings dialog on start up and the other options on this tab are disabled The Load default configuration file automatically option allows Log Ware to au tomatically load the specified configuration file every time LogWare starts up This option is useful if the same hardware configuration is used repeatedly to perform real time log sessions When this option is checked the configuration file to load must be specified The Default configuration file box indicates the configuration file that will be loaded automatically every time Log Ware starts up The configuration file will 5 Menus Tools menu only be loaded if the Show Log Session Settings dialog on start up and Load default configuration file automatically options are both checked Use the Browse button to locate the configuration file to be used as the default config uration file gt The Show Log Session Settings dialog after closing log session option deter mines whether the Log Session Settings dialog is displayed after the real time log session window is closed All real time log sessi
135. computer No special software or drivers are required to use the IR dongle All necessary communication protocols and drivers are built into the LogWare software To purchase an IR dongle contact Hart Scientific Technical Support Figure 164 IR dongle LogWare provides support for communicating over an IR port with these ther mometer readouts However the support is limited to the following features e Downloading logged data from the thermometer readout e Checking the thermometer readout s log status e Writing the thermometer readout s logging labels e Synchronizing the thermometer readout s date and time to the computer s clock e Accessing the thermometer readout s settings LogWare does not support using the IR port for performing real time log sessions 220 6 How to Changing logging label names 6 14 To use an IR dongle with LogWare Jl Locate a 9 pin or 25 pin COM RS 232 port on the computer Connect the IR dongle to the COM port If the COM port has a 25 pin connector use a 9 25 pin adapter to connect the IR dongle Select the appropriate menu option for the feature of Log Ware to use When selecting one of these menu options the Select Model dialog appears Select the model of the thermometer readout to use and the COM port to which the IR dongle is connected Tf the selected feature and the selected thermometer readout model sup port using the IR dongle the Use IR dongle check box is
136. currently selected window 5 Menus Help menu 5 8 5 8 1 5 8 2 5 8 3 Help menu The Help menu provides options for opening the LogWare s online help and for displaying information about Log Ware LogWare Help Fi Technical Support About LogWare Figure 157 Help menu Log Ware help The LogWare Help option opens the LogWare help file Technical support The Technical Support option opens the LogWare help file to the Technical Support topic For technical support information please refer to Section 10 1 Technical Support About Log Ware The About LogWare option displays the About Log Ware dialog a LogWare Il Version 1 0 152 Hart Scientific Multi Channel Data Acquisition Software C 2002 2005 All Rights Reserved Fluke Corporation Hart Scientific Division Figure 158 About LogWare dialog The About LogWare dialog displays specific information about the currently installed version of LogWare The software s name version build and copy right information are displayed 203 6 How to Setting up and starting a real time log session 6 1 6 2 How to The following sections describe in detail how to perform certain tasks using LogWare Setting up and starting a real time log session The main purpose of Log Ware is to perform real time data acquisition In order to do this Log Ware must be configured to acquire data on the channels of the thermometer readout t
137. d by LogWare to protect certain LogWare options and default settings on the LogWare Options dialog only Thermometer readout passcodes are spe cific to the thermometer readout being used and are required to change certain settings in the thermometer readout itself 5 To passcode protect probe conversion settings check the Protect probe conversion settings box 6 To passcode protect thermometer readout calibration parameters check the Protect calibration parameters check box Note These options only apply to thermometer readouts that do not have built in passcode protection for these features For thermometer readouts that do have built in passcode protection the thermometer readouts set tings override these settings Please refer to Section 5 6 4 Options for more information Setting up an administrator passcode Log Ware allows the user to setup an administrator passcode to protect some of the features and options of the LogWare software Some of these features include e Ability to set thermometer readout and or module serial numbers e Ability to specify passcode protection settings e Real time measurement process settings The administrator passcode can be setup or changed at any time by following the process below Note The administrator passcode in LogWare is completely independent of the thermometer readout passcodes The administrator passcode is used by LogWare to protect certain LogWare options and default setting
138. d by a gray filled circle Use the left and right arrow buttons at the top of the calendar to scroll through the months and years Enter the time at which the log session should start using the At this time box 2 Real time logging Log session settings dialog 2 3 5 A Note When using the Delayed Start feature make sure the Prompt to syn chronize real time log session option on the Log Ware Options dialog is not checked Otherwise the log session will not start as expected Please refer to Section 5 6 4 Options for more information Once the start date and or time have been selected click the OK button to close this dialog To cancel setting the delayed start date and or time click the Cancel button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog Alarm Settings dialog The Alarm Settings dialog is used to configure low and or high alarms The current low alarm or high alarm settings can be changed by selecting the Low alarm or High alarm tab respectively Low and high alarms are independent of each other and must be configured independently Alarm settings a Alarm settings Open Low alarm High alarm Save As Value IV Enable low alarm 25 00 E r Select the event for this alarm C No event C System beep C Display message Play WAY file indicated below Launch EXE file indicated below Path and filename je Windows Media Chimes way Browse Test
139. d channel Please refer to Section 2 3 6 Statistics Settings Dialog for more details on the Statistics Setting dialog By default the statistics that are enabled are Minimum Maximum Spread Average and Standard deviation Note Statistics are maintained for each channel independent of all other channels As a result each channel has its own settings which must be configured separately Each channel can be configured to trip an alarm if the reading on that channel ever exceeds specific low and or high values To enable alarms for the selected channel click the Alarm Settings button The Alarm Settings dialog is dis played This dialog is used to specify the alarm values and the actions associ ated with each alarm Please refer to Section 2 3 5 Alarm Settings Dialog for more details on the Alarm Settings dialog By default alarms are disabled Note The alarm settings for each channel are independent of all other channels As a result each channel must be configured separately Enter the name for the selected channel in the Channel name box The channel name should be something unique that identifies the purpose location or other information about the data being acquired on that channel When a channel name is changed the Channels list is updated to reflect the change By default each channel is assigned the generic name Channel n where n is the channel number This name appears in the Channels grid on the real time log sessio
140. d lines for the selected axis check the Show check box Select the list Style and Color for the grid lines Both axes are set to the same style and color but each axis can be set to show or hide grid lines in dependent of the other By default grid lines are not shown on the graph Fonts tab The Fonts tab can be used to change the typefaces and sizes of fonts used on the graph Titles Axis Fonts Trends Background Legend Apply To C Graph Title Other Titles Labels C Legend gt Typeface y r Size Y Smart Scal Name ail y Y Smart Scale Smaller Bigger Italic 4 E gt MV Bold I Underline Reset Figure 144 Graph Settings Fonts tab Note To restore the fonts to their default settings select the Restore De fault Settings option in the Graph menu Select the title label or legend option to which the font settings are to be ap plied using the Apply To option The Typeface and Size controls display the current settings for the selected option 185 User s Guide 5 5 1 4 186 Select the font name from the Typeface drop down list and choose the styles to apply to the selected title label or legend Select the font size to apply to the selected title label or legend by clicking on the scroll bar or dragging the scroll bar s thumb Selecting the Smart Scale op tion allows the graph to automatically reduce the size of the selected font if the dimensions of the graph bec
141. d negative directions to include all of the graph s values e Variable Origin Select this option to have the axis zoom in on the range of the graph s actual values whether or not that range includes zero e User Defined This option allows the user to set values for the minimum maximum and number of ticks for the axis When this option is selected the settings in the Range group are enabled By default the X axis and Y axis are both set to Variable Origin Note Changing the Scale settings especially for the X axis while ac quiring real time data could possibly cause graphing problems to occur Therefore it is recommended that these settings NOT be changed by the user when acquiring real time data The Range options are only enabled if the User Defined option is selected in the Scale options for the selected axis Enter the Maximum and Minimum val ues for the selected axis The selected axis is rescaled to the settings entered The Ticks option allows the user to determine how many major tick marks should be displayed between the minimum and maximum values on the se lected axis Each major tick mark is labeled with the appropriate value The tick marks themselves are only displayed if the Show check box in the Tick Marks controls is checked By default these settings are not used by the software because of the default Scale settings The Tick Marks options allow the user to specify whether or not to show tick mark
142. details regarding the software End User License Agree ment EULA refer to the online help file s License Agreement topic Features LogWare provides an easy to use Windows interface to acquire store and an alyze data from Hart Scientific s multi channel digital thermometer readouts LogWare also provides a method to download readings that are stored in the logs or memory of thermometer readouts After being acquired or downloaded the readings are written to a file that can be opened by Log Ware a spreadsheet or other analysis software LogWare s data logging features include e Quick and easy configuration e Ability to save and open configuration files e Selectable sample interval from 1 second to 60 hours depending on ther mometer readout e Selectable scan sequence interval from 1 minute to 60 hours e Selectable delayed start date time for off hours logging e Selectable end log options to stop session after specified time or number of readings e Acquires readings to ASCII text files which can be opened graphed and printed e Graphs readings as they are being acquired e Ability to acquire data in multiple scales simultaneously e Maintains statistical data for all channels e Selectable high and low alarm settings with user defined events Can be configured to play WAV file or launch an application such as pager software when an alarm trips e User customizable graph settings including titles legend grid li
143. dule Settings Model Serial Identification Channels 2562 fa 9562 PRTS 1 2362419562 e General l Channels Calibration Excitation current Resistance range fi m y Auto y a Apply Front row wires Rear row wires 4 wire 4 wire Cancel e Help Figure 80 2562 PRTS Module Settings dialog The Model box indicates the model number of this module The Serial box in dicates the serial number assigned to this module The Identification box indi cates the module name number of devices model number serial number and firmware version installed in this module The Channels box indicates the num ber of input channels on this module General module settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the General tab The Channels tab displays a list of the channels on this module and allows access to channel settings dialogs The module calibration information can be viewed and modified by selecting the Calibration tab After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new module settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dia log closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the module settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set 4 Tools Thermometer settings dia
144. e 20 A When a log session starts LogWare will automatically set the thermometer readout s system units to use the selected scale However if the lt keep exist ing gt option is selected LogWare will query the thermometer readout to deter mine the current system units Note When starting a log session Log Ware checks the conversion setting for each enabled channel If a channel is configured to read temperature the units that were selected in the Session temperature scale drop down list are used If a channel is not configured to read temperature i e resis tance or voltage Log Ware automatically determines the non temperature units for that channel Enter the resolution number of digits after the decimal point that Log Ware should use to format all of the measurements acquired This setting is common to all channels from which measurements are acquired Where applicable LogWare will automatically set the thermometer readout s resolution to this set ting when a log session starts Where not applicable LogWare will round more precise measurements or add 0 s to less precise measurements to obtain the de sired format Note The resolution setting should be set prior to configuring the alarm settings for each channel since the alarm values will also use this resolu tion Changing the resolution setting after configuring the alarms does not reformat the alarm values Select the COM port on the computer to which the t
145. e 4821 5482 8 72172008 y Probe Type PRT y Conversion type Irs 30 X Conversion Settings Figure 50 1523 1524 PRT Thermistor Channel Settings Probe tab Enter the serial number of the probe attached to this channel in the probe serial number box The serial number can be any combination of numbers and or let ters up to 8 characters in length The underscore _ character can also be used in serial numbers Select the date this probe was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for the probe Select the appropriate probe type for this probe using the Probe Type drop down list The choices are PRT or Thermistor Select the conversion type to use for the probe on this channel The conversion types available in the drop down list are dependent on the Probe Type selection For PRT probe types the available conversion types are e ITS 90 e ITS 90 Subrange 5 e PT100 e Callendar Van Dusen e Ohms 79 User s Guide For Thermistor probe types the available conversion types are e RT e Ohms Refer to the Report of Calibration for the probe for information on the conver sion type that the probe was calibrated for If the selected conversion type requires coefficients or other settings the Con version Settings button is enabled Click the Conversion Settings button to dis play the dialog for the selected conversion ty
146. e to convert the readings on that channel to temperature by clicking the Conversion Settings button 9 Toconfigure the selected channel to read resistance voltage ratio or W set the Conversion type appropriately Refer to the thermometer read out s User s Guide for more details on the conversion types supported by the thermometer readout 10 Click the OK button on the Channel Settings dialog to write the new set tings to the thermometer readout 11 Repeat steps 3 to 6 for the other channels that need to be configured 6 How to Setting up LogWare to read multiple scales 12 13 14 15 16 Click the OK button on the Thermometer Settings dialog when finished Note that the Serial number and Session temperature scale boxes are filled in automatically when returning to the Log Session Settings dialog Set the Session temperature scale to lt keep existing gt using the drop down list Finish setting up the remainder of the settings on the Log Session Set tings dialog for this log session When the log session starts Log Ware will query the thermometer read out to determine the system temperature units Session temperature scale and the conversion setting of each enabled channel The system temperature units are then automatically applied to all channels that are configured to read temperature All other channels use the appropriate scale depending on their conversion type setting Please refer to Sect
147. e 1 s 2 s 5 s and 10s Note Changing this setting may affect the Display Interval setting as Sample Period cannot be greater than Display Interval Use the Display Interval drop down list to select how often the instrument s dis play statistics fields memory and communications ports are updated Possible values are 1 s 2 s 10 s 30 s and 60 s Note Changing this setting may affect the Sample Period setting as Sam ple Period cannot be greater than Display Interval Use the Average Enable drop down list to select whether averaging is enabled On or disabled Off If the setting is On all measurements acquired at the Sample Period rate are averaged prior to updating the instrument s display If the setting is Off the latest measurement acquired at the Sample Period rate is used to update the instrument s display Use the Stop Timer Enable drop down list to select whether the stop timer is enabled On or disabled Off If the setting is On a timer begins counting down when a measurement is started and stops the measurement automatically 163 User s Guide 164 4 4 6 4 when the timer elapses If the setting is Off the Timer Duration is not applica ble and is disabled The Timer Duration determines the amount of time a measurement runs If the Stop Timer Enable is Off this setting is not applicable and is disabled The timer duration can be set to any time between 00 00 01 and 23 59 59 with the time format set as
148. e 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 1523 Logging Label dialog o 69 1524 Logging Labels dial g o 70 1529 Chub E4 Logging Labels dialog 71 1523 1524 Settings dialog 2 2 ee ee 73 1523 1524 Settings Sampling tab 74 1523 1524 Settings Channels tab o o 75 1523 1524 Settings Calibration tab 76 1523 1524 Settings Misc tab o o 77 1523 1524 PRT Thermistor Channel Settings dialog 78 1523 1524 PRT Thermistor Channel Settings Probe tab 79 1523 1524 PRT Thermistor Channel Settings Misc tab 80 1523 1524 Thermocouple Channel Settings dialog 81 1523 1524 Thermocouple Channel Settings Probe tab 82 1523 1524 Thermocouple Channel Settings Misc tab 84 1529 Chub E4 Settings dialog 2 2 a 85 1529 Chub E4 Settings Filtering tab 86 1529 Chub E4 Settings Sampling tab 87 1529 Chub E4 Settings Measurement Tab 88 1529 Chub E4 Settings Misctab o o 89 1529 Chub E4 Settings Channels tab 89 1529 Chub E4 PRT thermistor channel settings dialog 90 1529 Chub E4 PRT thermistor channel settings Probe tab 91
149. e Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings To close this dialog without writing the channel settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Use the Type drop down list to select the probe type for the selected probe Possible probe types are PRT Thermistor or Resistor 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs The Resistor Value is the calibrated resistance of the resistor The Maximum Current sets a limit for the resistor s sensing current Possible values are any value between 0 01 and 20 0 mA The Calibration Date may be used to record the date the resistor was calibrated The calibration date is an optional parameter The checkbox next to the calibra tion date field indicates whether the resistor s calibration date is saved in the in strument If the checkbox is checked the resistor s calibration date is saved in the instrument If the checkbox is unchecked the resistor s calibration date is set to zeros in the instrument The Calibration Due date may be used to record the date the resistor is due for recalibration The calibration due date is an optional parameter The checkbox next to this field indicates whether the resistor s calibration due date is saved in the instrument If the checkbox is checked the resistor s calibration due date is saved in the i
150. e LogWare Options dialog is displayed Select the Admin Passcode tab Click the Edit Protected Options button to enter the administrator passcode The Enter Passcode dialog is displayed Enter the current administrator passcode in the Passcode box and click the OK button to continue If the entered passcode is correct the features and settings on the LogWare Options dialog are enabled and may be changed These settings are only enabled until this dialog is closed The administrator passcode can also be removed from Log Ware which permits anyone to change any of Log Ware s options To remove the administrator passcode 1 gt 9 pp Select the Options option in the Tools menu The LogWare Options dialog is displayed Select the Admin Passcode tab Click the Change Admin Passcode button to setup or change the admin istrator passcode 217 User s Guide 218 6 10 6 11 5 The Enter Passcode dialog is displayed Enter the current administrator passcode in the Passcode box and click the OK button to continue 6 The Change Passcode dialog is displayed Leave the New passcode box Confirm passcode boxes empty Click the OK button A message is dis played warning that passcode protection is about to be disabled Confirm disabling passcode protection by clicking the Yes button Please refer to Section 5 6 4 Options for more information Viewing remaining memory for logging data Some thermometer readouts
151. e a e e ee 62 3 4 4 1560 Black Stack log status dialog 2 2 00 0 0 oo 62 Tools meit pe hoo Sean ar Gade Sat be 65 4 1 1 Synchronize date time o o o ooo ooooo o o eee 65 4 1 2 Logeing labels s s arsa Sas ewe SSS oe we SRS ae ee as Ho 66 4 1 3 Thermometer settings s s y ocd seis Beis Bue ee alte Hk es Bley sd 66 Select Model dialog ici oe ea ee Pe ee 67 Logging labels dialogs o o 69 4 3 1 1523 Handheld logging label dialog o o o 69 4 3 2 1524 Handheld logging labels dialog o o 70 4 3 3 1529 Chub E4 logging labels s s soe ioo mos o oo o 71 Thermometer settings dialogs o 72 4 4 1 1523 1524 Handheld Settings o o o o eee 72 AALI Sampling tab si cs Sod pode a Bde Eee a Se Sa ee 44 12 Channels tabs e coros ne aa Sih aed Mo ge Gk Re Beh Ree rial pete a 44 13 Calibration tab rca ia aS a ch A Ba eA A AAAA MisctaDi ccc ee ee Gin ek ee ee a ak dew Foe ae A ath we eG 4 4 1 5 1523 1524 PRT thermistor channel settings dialog 4 4 1 5 1 Probe tab 4 4 1 5 2 Misc tab 4 4 1 6 1523 1524 thermocouple channel settings dialog 4 4 2 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 AAG Pe D is ia aa dc dota a e de BAS Bede data 82 AALO Mise tab oso ios ge ta O Ra A da Ra Rac 84 1529 Chub E4 settings dialog 2 2 2 oo o 84 442 1 Filtering Wb oia cra Sos A REG ee aoe
152. e a reminder to the user to connect the thermometer readout so that the software can communicate with it If the thermometer readout is frequently disconnected from the computer this option may be left checked If the thermometer readout is always connected to the computer these prompts may become bothersome In this case uncheck this option so that the prompts are not displayed The Show gridlines on graphs option determines whether gridlines are enabled on the real time log session and previous log session graphs by default The gridlines can be enabled or disabled for a specific graph at any time using the Grids controls on the Axis tab of the Graph Settings dialog Please refer to Section 5 5 1 2 Axis Tab for more details The Enable communication debugging option is used to enable debugging fea tures in LogWare This option should remain unchecked unless otherwise di rected by a Customer Service representative 5 Menus Tools menu 5 6 4 2 Folders tab The Folders tab displays options pertaining to the default folders to which Log Ware saves various types of files General Folders Tools Admin Passcode Default folder for configuration files Ic Program Files FlukeHart Scientific LogWare II Config E Default folder for output files Ic Program Files FlukeHart Scientific LogWare II Output al Default folder for download files Ic Program Files FlukeHart Scientific LogWare II Downlo E Figure 151 L
153. e filter type is set to None the Response time and Threshold settings are not applicable and are disabled If the filter type is set to Average or Exponen tial the Response time and Threshold settings are enabled Enter the response time for the filter in the Response time box The response time can be set to any value between 2 and 200 seconds Enter the threshold to use for the selected filter in the Threshold box The threshold can be set to any value between 0001 and 1 000 000 Sampling tab Select the Sampling tab to view and or modify sampling settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Calibration Units Sample action Sample n C y Run y 1000 Sample timing Sample interval Integration time Conversion time fio eE o i Resolutions Temperature Resistance Ratio fe amp FE Some sampling settings are passcode protected Figure 122 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings Sampling tab Select the units using the Units drop down list Readings can be displayed in either C F K Ohms Ratio or W Note This setting may override the selected conversion type for each channel Please refer to the thermometer readout s User s Guide for more information on setting the system units Select the sample action from the Sample action drop down list The sample action can be set to one of the following options 151 User s Guide 152 e Run e Stop e Sample n If the sample act
154. e is down load txt e If the Separate readings by channel option was selected a prompt appears for every channel By default the filenames are downloadn txt where n 1s the channel number Accept the default filename s or enter new filename s and click the Save but ton to continue If a file with the selected filename already exists confirm over writing the existing file or enter a new filename Clicking the Cancel button on the Windows Save As dialog aborts the download process If the Prompt to enter filename s option was not selected the data is saved to file s with the default filename s Once all of the downloaded data has been saved into the specified file s the names of all of the files are displayed on the Downloaded Files dialog see Fig ure 169 on page 233 To open a file that downloaded data was written to double click the appropriate entry in the list The file will be opened in the File Viewer window For more details on the File Viewer window please refer to Section 2 4 8 File Viewer Window To print a file check the Send file s directly to default printer when dou ble clicked option Double clicking an entry in the list will then cause the file to be sent to the current default printer Click the OK button to close this dialog 1575A Super Thermometer download process The download process for the 1575A Super Thermometer readout consists of 3 main steps 1 Download the data from the
155. e the probe settings are being read in After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is 157 User s Guide 4 4 5 6 1 158 clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the channel settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the channel settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Probe tab Select the Probe tab to view and or modify probe settings Probe Probe serial number 362599 Reference Current IW offset 100 Ohm y 1 41 40 0 000000 Conversion type ITS 90 ye Conversion Settings Figure 127 1590 Super Thermometer 11 2590 Mighty Mux II Channel Settings Probe tab Enter the serial number of the selected probe in the Probe serial number box The serial number can be any combination of numbers and or letters up to 8 characters in length The dash charact
156. e tools are accessible by selecting the Thermome ter Settings option in the Tools menu The following sections describe the dialogs for each of the thermometer readouts that support this feature 1523 1524 Handheld Settings The 1523 1524 Settings dialog displays information about the thermometer readout including model number serial number identification information and 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs the total number of channels It also allows many thermometer readout settings to be viewed and modified 1524 Settings m 1524 Settings Model Serial Identification Channels fi 524 3700277 FLO KE 1524 9700277 0 2 Edit Sampling Channels Calibration Misc Units C z Cancel Some settings are passcode protected Help Figure 44 1523 1524 Settings dialog The 1523 1524 Handheld Thermometer readout must be connected to an avail able COM port and the communication settings must be properly configured so that this information can be read in from the thermometer readout If communi cation with the thermometer readout is not successful an error message is dis played and this dialog is blank The Model box indicates the model number of the thermometer readout The Serial box indicates the serial number assigned to this thermometer readout The Identification box indicates the manufacturer name model number serial number and firmware version installed in this thermometer readout
157. e used in serial numbers Select the type of reference junction compensation to use on this channel using the RJC type drop down list Available choices are Internal and External If Ex ternal is chosen as the RJC type the external RJC temperature must be entered in the RJC temperature box Enter the external RJC temperature value in the RJC temperature box This box is disabled if the RJC type is set to Internal Note The RJC temperature value must always be in C Select the conversion type to use for the probe on this channel The Model 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout supports the following conversion types e Polynomial e Thermocouple Type B E J K N R S T or AuPt e Volts Refer to the Report of Calibration for the probe for information on the conver sion type that the probe was calibrated for If the selected conversion type requires coefficients or other settings the Con version Settings button is enabled Click the Conversion Settings button to dis play the dialog for the selected conversion type Otherwise the Conversion 95 User s Guide 96 4 4 2 7 2 4 4 3 Settings button is disabled Please refer to Section 9 Conversion Settings Dialogs for a detailed description of the Conversion Settings dialogs Note The conversion settings are not written to the thermometer readout until the Apply or OK button is clicked on this dialog Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify cha
158. eadout If the correct passcode is entered the calibration parame ter controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button A Caution Do not change these values unless this module has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values located on the latest Report of Calibration for this module Changing these values voids the current calibration The AMP GA constant should always be set to 1 and cannot be changed Select the date this module was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module Enter the values for the calibration constants in the boxes provided The cali bration constants required by the 2565 module are OS 1 GA 1 and CJ 1 for channel 1 and OS 2 GA 2 and CJ 2 for channel 2 The values of these con stants should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module 121 User s Guide 4 4 3 11 122 2566 TCS Module Settings dialog The 2566 Module Settings dialog displays information about the 2566 module including model number serial number identification information and the number of channels on this module It also allows many module specific set tings to be viewed and or modified 2566 Module Settings m 2566 Module Settings Model Serial Identificat
159. eadout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 5 1 4 4 3 5 2 General tab Select the General tab to view and or modify general module settings General l Channels Calibration Excitation current Resistance range 1 ma y Auto Figure 73 2560 SPRT Module Settings General tab Select the excitation current for this module using the Excitation current drop down list The 2560 module can use either a 1 mA or a 1 414 mA excita tion current This setting applies to all channels on this module Select the resistance range for this module using the Resistance range drop down list The 2560 module allows the selection of either Auto High or Low This setting applies to all channels on this module Channels tab Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels on this module and to access the channel settings dialogs to view and or modify channel specific settings General Channels Calibration Channels Channel Settings 2 362012 Figure 74 2560 SPRT Module Settings Channels tab Select the channel to view and or modify from the Channels list This list indi cates the channel number with respect to this module and the serial number of the probe on each channel 103 User s Guide 104 4 4 3 5 3 Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate Channel Settings d
160. eature which allows many of the thermometer readout and probe settings to be read in viewed modified and written back out to the ther mometer readout These settings vary from thermometer readout to thermome ter readout but include e Filtering averaging e Resolution e Calibration and recalibration dates e Calibration constants e Probe serial number e Probe wires and excitation current e Probe calibration and recalibration dates e Probe conversion type and calibration coefficients Note In order to use this feature of LogWare the thermometer readout must have a recent firmware version If your thermometer readout does not have a recent firmware version it may be upgraded For more details contact Hart Scientific Technical Support Please refer to Section 1 4 4 Firmware Requirements for more details To view modify and write thermometer and probe settings 1 Select the Thermometer Settings option in the Tools menu 2 The Select Model dialog is displayed Select the thermometer readout model Also select the COM port to which the thermometer readout is connected and the baud rate to use Make sure Log Ware can communi 209 User s Guide 6 6 210 cate with the thermometer readout by clicking the Test Communication button Click the OK button when communication is successful 3 The thermometer readout settings are then read in and displayed in the thermometer settings dialog The thermometer settings dial
161. eing read in The Model box indicates the model number of the thermometer readout The Identification box indicates the model number and firmware version installed in this thermometer readout The Channels box indicates the total number of input channels on this thermometer readout The filtering settings can be viewed and or modified by selecting the Filtering tab The sampling settings can be viewed and or modified by selecting the Sam pling tab The measurement settings can be viewed and or modified by select ing the Measurement tab The Channels tab displays a list of channels and allows access to channel settings dialogs The thermometer readout calibration information can be viewed and or modified by selecting the Calibration tab The settings on each of these tabs are described in detail in the following sec 149 User s Guide 150 4 4 5 1 tions For more details on these settings please refer to the thermometer read out s User s Guide If any of the settings on the 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings dialog are passcode protected a message appears at the bottom of the appropriate tab and the Edit button is displayed The controls for the passcode protected settings are disabled To edit the protected settings click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is en tered the controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls re main enabled until thi
162. el button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog Thermistor Settings dialog The Thermistor Settings dialog allows the Thermistor T R or Thermistor R T coefficients to be entered If the Thermistor coefficients were read in from the thermometer readout the boxes are filled with the current coefficient values Select the Open button to display the Windows Open dialog to open a previ ously saved configuration file which contains Thermistor coefficients Select the Save As button to display the Windows Save As dialog to save the current Thermistor coefficients to a configuration file 247 User s Guide 248 9 8 1 Click the OK button to accept the current coefficients and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog Thermistor T R Settings dialog Tf the selected conversion type is T R the Thermistor T R Settings dialog is displayed Thermistor T R Settings q Thermistor T R Settings gt Open AO la 3454564E 01 Save As Al fi 9578446E 00 A2 5 4546456E 03 A Cancel 2 45446E 08 Help ME tio Figure 179 Thermistor T R Settings dialog Enter the values for all Thermistor T R coefficients from the Report of Cali bration in
163. eld and 1529 Chub E4 download process 233 1560 Black Stack download process 234 1575A Super Thermometer download process 235 1590 Super Thermometer II download process 236 9 Conversion settings dialogs 239 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 11 9 12 ITS 90 Settings dial08 ee 239 9 1 1 Low Rangedabs s os pio eb DE EER SEA A OD Be 240 9 1 2 High Range tab 4 004 wade hae ie eh be del deme kb he ees 240 IPTS 68 settings dialog o o 242 Callendar Van Dusen Settings dialog 243 PT100 Settings dialog o e 244 High Temperature PRT Settings dialog 245 Polynomial Settings dialog o o 246 W T90 Settings dialog o ss ee oceana oo 247 Thermistor Settings dialog o 247 9 8 1 Thermistor T R Settings dialog 2 0 oo e 248 9 8 2 Thermistor R T Settings dialog o oo 249 Thermocouple Polynomial Settings dialog 250 Thermocouple Table Settings dialog 251 Thermocouple Type Settings dialog 252 Thermocouple Type Polynomial Settings dialog 254 10 Troubleshooting sa 4446 i 4 4 68208 amp 4S6 297 10 1 10 2 10 3 Technical support 2 2 2 2 0 20 20 0 0000 257 Troubleshooting common problems 259
164. els Calibration Excitation current Resistance range o1 m Auto Front row wires Rear row wires 4 wire bs 4 wire bus Figure 105 2568 RTDS Module Settings General tab Select the excitation current for this module using the Excitation current drop down list The 2568 module can use either a 0 05 mA or a 0 1 mA excita tion current This setting applies to all channels on this module Select the resistance range for this module using the Resistance range drop down list The 2568 module allows the selection of either Auto High or Low This setting applies to all channels on this module Select the front row wires option for this module using the Front row wires drop down list The 2568 module allows the selection of either 4 wire or 3 wire This setting applies only to the four channels on the front row of this module Select the rear row wires option for this module using the Rear row wires drop down list The 2568 module allows the selection of either 4 wire or 3 wire This setting applies only to the four channels on the rear row of this module 131 User s Guide 132 4 4 3 13 2 4 4 3 13 3 Channels tab Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels on this module and to access the channel settings dialogs to view and or modify channel specific settings General Channels Calibration Channels Channel Settings Figure 106 2568 RTDS Module Settings Channels tab
165. enabled Check the Use IR dongle check box Before continuing make sure the thermometer readout s IR port and the IR dongle are in close proximity and the path between them is unob structed For more details on placement of the IR dongle refer to the thermometer readout s User s Guide Click the Test Communication button on the Select Model dialog If Log Ware succeeds in communicating with the thermometer readout us ing the IR dongle a success message is displayed Otherwise a failure message is displayed In case of failure check the following The dongle is connected to the selected COM port The thermometer readout is powered up and operating The dongle is within the required range of the thermometer readout s IR port The path between the thermometer readout s IR port and the IR dongle is not obstructed The thermometer readout s IR baud rate matches the baud rate setting on the Select Model dialog The thermometer readout s IR mode is set properly to send receive commands see thermometer readout User s Guide Shut the thermometer readout s power off then back on again Changing logging label names Some of the thermometer readouts supported by Log Ware have labels that can be assigned to data that is logged in the thermometer readout s memory LogWare provides a utility to view and or change the names of these logging labels 221 User s Guide 222 6 15 To view and
166. ent Channels Misc Scan channels v 4 Channel 2 v Channel 3 M Channel 4 Enable All Disable All Figure 58 1529 Chub E4 Settings Measurement Tab Scan mode Simultaneous b Select the scan mode for the 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout using the Scan mode drop down list The scan mode can be set to one of the following options e Scan e Simultaneous Select the channels that the thermometer readout should measure Each channel can be enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking the box next to the chan nel number independent of all other channels To enable all channels click the Enable All button This causes the box next to every channel to be checked To disable all channels click the Disable All button This causes the box next to every channel to be unchecked Channels Tab Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels and to access the channel and 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 2 5 probe settings dialogs to view and or modify channel and probe specific set tings Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Misc Channel Settings Channels Channel 1 PRT 1 362568 369867 Channel 3 TC 1 365234 Channel 4 TC 2 356878 Figure 60 1529 Chub E4 Settings Channels tab Select the channel to view and or modify from the Channels list This list indi cates the channel number channel type and the serial number of the probe on each c
167. enter filenames di Figure 29 1523 Download Options dialog 3 Downloading logged data Download options dialogs 3 3 2 The demand log stores up to 25 readings For more details on the demand log see the 1523 User s Guide The Readings section allows the readings to be downloaded to be specified Selecting the Download all readings from log option indicates that all of the readings in the selected log should be downloaded Selecting the Download only reading for this index option allows only the read ing at the selected index 1 to 25 to be downloaded If this option is selected use the drop down list to select the appropriate index of the reading to download Select the resolution to use to format the readings when they are written to the download file This value can be set between 0 and 3 digits places after deci mal point Select the method to use when writing the downloaded readings to a file using the options in the Files section Selecting the Write all readings into a single file option causes all of the down loaded readings to be written to one file Selecting the Separate readings by index option causes one file to be created for each index for which there is a reading available Each file will contain a single reading If the Prompt to enter filename s check box is checked a prompt is displayed after the data is downloaded for each file that needs to be created depending on the othe
168. enu and allows quick access to graph related functions Some of the options apply only to the currently selected channel Graph Settings Restore Default Settings Trace Color Zoom In Restore Print Graph Figure 25 Graph popup menu 2 Real time logging Previous log session 2 5 4 There are many customizable settings for the graph such as titles a legend background and text colors grid lines and trend lines All of these features can be accessed by selecting the Graph Settings option in the popup menu or in the Graph menu The default graph settings can be restored by selecting the Re store Default Settings option in the popup menu or in the Graph menu For more details on customizing the graph settings please refer to Section 5 5 1 Graph Settings Dialog The Zoom In and Restore options are can be used to zoom in to a small section of the graph and to restore the graph to its default state respectively Please re fer to Section 2 5 4 Graph Zooming for more details on using the graph zoom ing feature The graph may be printed at any time by selecting the Print Graph option in the popup menu or in the Graph menu or by selecting the Print Graph option in the File menu Graph zooming LogWare allows the graph in the Previous Log Session window to be zoomed to view a small section of the graph in more detail The zoom feature can be en abled by selecting the Zoom In option in the Graph menu or by right
169. er with respect to this module and the serial number of the probe on each channel Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate channel settings di alog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel are read in from the thermometer readout The Channel Settings dialog is described in detail in Section 4 4 3 14 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings Dialog Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify module calibration informa tion General Channels Calibration Calibration date Edit 0ADJ 1K ADJ 4K ADJ WARNING Changing these values voids the module calibration Calibration parameters are passcode protected Figure 103 2567 RTD Module Settings Calibration tab The settings on the Calibration tab may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the Calibration tab and the Edit button is dis played The other controls on this tab are disabled To edit the calibration pa rameters click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the calibration parame ter controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button Caution Do not change these values unless this module has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values
170. er can also be used in serial numbers Select the reference resistor for the selected probe using the Reference drop down list The choices for the reference resistor are e External resistor e 1Ohm 10 Ohm 100 Ohm 10K Ohm Note The External resistor option is not available for Input 2 because the external reference resistor must be connected to Input 2 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 6 Enter the excitation current for the selected probe in the Current box provided The excitation current can be set to any value between 0 0001 and 21 0 mA Enter the 3 wire offset value for the selected probe in the 3W offset box pro vided The 3 wire offset can be set to any value between 0 and 1 000 000 ohms Select the conversion type to use for the selected probe The Model 1590 Super Thermometer II readout supports the following conversion types e ITS 90 e IPTS 68 e CVD Callendar Van Dusen e W T90 e R T e T R e Polynomial e Ohms e Ratio Refer to the Report of Calibration for the selected probe for information on the conversion type that the probe was calibrated for If the selected conversion type requires coefficients or other settings the Con version Settings button is enabled Otherwise the Conversion Settings button is disabled Click the Conversion Settings button to display the dialog for the se lected conversion type Please refer to Section 9 Conversion Settings Dialogs for a detailed desc
171. er readout User s Guide The Readings section allows the number of readings to be downloaded to be specified Selecting the Download all readings from log option indicates that all of the readings in the selected log should be downloaded Selecting the Download only readings with this label option allows only read ings that are assigned the label indicated below to be downloaded from the se lected log If this option is selected a list of current labels is read in from the thermometer readout Use the drop down list to select the appropriate label 53 User s Guide 54 Enter the resolution to use to format the readings when they are written to the download file in the Resolution box This value can be set between 0 and 4 dig its places after decimal point Select the method to use when writing the downloaded readings to a file using the options in the Files section Selecting the Write all readings into a single file option causes all of the down loaded readings to be written to one file 1529 Chub E4 Download Options i 1529 Chub E4 Download Options Select log to download C Demand log e Auto log m Readings C Download all readings from log Download only readings with this label DATA_02 ng Resolution 4 digits Files Write all readings into a single file Separate readings by channel Close V Prompt to enter filenames di Figure
172. ermocouple Type Settings dialog allows the Type Temperature and Off set values and DC1 amp DC2 coefficients to be entered Thermocouple Type Settings m Thermocouple Type Settings Open Type s si Save As Temperature Offset 1 1100 0 E 0 0 E 2 200 0 E 0 0 1E 3 200 0 E 0 0 JE DC1 DC2 1 4544646E D4 5 4568786E 05 Help Figure 183 Thermocouple Polynomial Settings dialog If the Thermocouple Type coefficients were read in from the thermometer read out the boxes are filled with the current coefficient values and settings The Type drop down list allows the standard thermocouple type to be selected Thermocouple types include B E J K N R S T and AuPt The choices in 9 Conversion settings dialogs Thermocouple Type Settings dialog the list may be limited depending on the thermocouple types supported by the thermometer readout being used The Temperature and Offset boxes provide a method to use an offset table with this thermocouple type Up to three Temperature Offset pairs can be entered If no offset table is to be used make sure the values in the Offset boxes are all set to 0 0 Note If any one of the temperature values is set to O C that point is ig nored because the voltage on a thermocouple at 0 C is always assumed to be OmV If the selected thermocouple type is type S or type R the DC1 and DC2 boxes are displayed The DC1 and DC2 values are delta A values for the
173. es e p e da Ree eb AA E E A 54 AAS Calibration tabs osea ad a dee a a hoala a AURE RA 56 4 4 5 6 1590 Super Thermometer 11 2590 Mighty Mux IP Channel Settings dialog 157 AAS ON BrobetaDa ota AE A RO ee AA a a est 158 4 4 6 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Settings dialog 159 061 Filteringtab s esa ea eee LEO eRe RRR SE REM A 61 4 4 6 2 Display tabi wii soe ana aie ace o ee ha A ad ee ta de 62 4463 446 3 Timing tabs is cnn ss sa ee Ee Ew Ke AA 63 4464 Scalabrini oe ee aaa A a a eae 64 44 65 Channel Setup taDu ico sak a aig base be Bok A Sa aim bs Soe Rubee 65 4 4 6 6 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Probe Settings dialog 66 4 4 6 7 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Channel Settings dialog 2 2 0 68 4 4 6 8 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Rs Settings dialog 70 5 Menus as as were LS 5 1 5 2 3 3 5 4 3 Fl MEDI ra le ao GR Re eh a ais 173 5 1 1 NEW iow e a e e a e a a ee 173 3 12 A A 173 5 1 3 SAVE ASe e erg ee gen Di ia Da 174 5 1 4 Print ss he as EE HRS oras a a 175 SIAL Readings siaaa e A es a Ee ee PA Eas ae 175 IMAZ Graph ois oi Heke We a a hk ds GO ok teed et AA a Be 175 5 15 Exito ai ma ea a a a a E RE 175 Datalog Men e cce ea dpo madre eda 175 5 2 1 Selpr sui Galak od bow ee Bak abad eaa ad pad 175 5 2 2 Start ste a Bie be AA A Be hh OE a ot A 176 5 2 3 SOP aa aw 24 gt SA a Pe AV Ge GI abe Pw Pa es 176 5 2 4 Clos cacas eee Mia de
174. etting Enter the conversion time value in the Conversion time box provided or use the up down buttons The conversion time can be set to any value between 2 and 10 seconds The Resolutions controls allow the thermometer readout s resolution settings to be viewed and or modified The resolution settings include the Temperature Resistance and Ratio settings Enter the resolution for temperature readings in the Temperature box provided or use the up down buttons The temperature resolution can be set to any value between 0 and 8 digits places after decimal point 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 5 3 Enter the resolution for resistance readings in the Resistance box provided or use the up down buttons The resistance resolution can be set to any value be tween 0 and 8 digits places after decimal point Enter the resolution for ratio readings in the Ratio box provided or use the up down buttons The ratio resolution can be set to any value between 0 and 8 digits places after decimal point Measurement tab Select the Measurement tab to view and or modify measurement settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Calibration Channel mode Repetitions Scanner channe Scanner sequence y fi E Scanner sequence mode Seq channels User defined scanner sequence 30 User defined scanner sequence Steps Scanner sequence Step channel 31 Input 2 y 2 Scanner 1 3 Scanner 2 4
175. figured properly prior to starting log session See Communication Problems above Upgrade computer to faster processor add more memory and or free up some hard drive space optionally reduce the rate at which LogWare acquires data See Communication Problems above Reduce the sample rate Interval between channels setting LogWare does not allow the real time graph to be zoomed or scrolled by the user Make sure a printer driver is installed for the printer to print to Make sure the printer is connected turned on and ready fill the paper tray if necessary Print a test page from the printer s Property pages to make sure it is working Make sure each channel is configured to read the proper units scale before starting the log session Previous Log Session Problems Unable to successfully open output or down load file Cannot print the readings or graph File is corrupt File has been modified File is too large Printer not installed Printer not connected or online There is no solution to this problem Make sure the file follows the required format NEVER MANUALLY MODIFY THESE FILES Make sure a printer driver is installed for the printer to print to Make sure the printer is connected turned on and ready fill the paper tray if necessary Print a test page from the printer s Property pages to make sure it is working Downloading Problems Unable to download readings Poor communication
176. for the currently selected step using the Step Channel drop down list Channels tab Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels on the 1590 Super Thermom 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs eter II readout and to access the channel settings dialogs to view and or modify channel specific settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Calibration Channels Channel Settings Scanner 1 Probe 3 Scanner 2 Probe 4 Scanner 3 Probe 5 Scanner 4 Probe 6 Scanner 5 Probe 7 Scanner 6 Probe 8 Scanner 7 Probe 9 Scanner 8 Probe 10 Scanner 9 Probe 11 Scanner 10 Probe 12 Scanner 11 Probe 13 Scanner 12 Probe 14 Scanner 13 Probe 15 y Figure 124 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings Channels tab Select the channel to view and or modify from the Channels list This list indi cates the channel number and the current probe that is assigned to each channel Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate channel settings di alog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel are read in from the thermometer readout The Channel Settings dialog is described in detail in Section 4 4 5 6 1590 Super Thermometer 11 2590 Mighty Mux II Channel Settings Dialog 155 User s Guide 4 4 5 5 Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify thermometer readout calibra tion information Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Calibratio
177. g information is intended to provide a brief overview on how to get LogWare up and running quickly 1 Introduction Running LogWare To use this software 1 Click the Start button then locate and click the icon created by the setup process 2 The software will start with the Log Session Settings dialog displayed If the Log Session Settings dialog is not displayed when the software starts select the Setup option in the Datalog menu to display the Log Session Settings dialog Note In order to make the Log Session Settings dialog appear automati cally every time Log Ware starts check the Show Log Session Settings di alog on start up check box on the General tab of the Options dialog The Options dialog can be displayed by selecting the Options option in the Tools menu Please refer to Section 5 6 4 Options for more details 3 To start a log session fill in the information on the Log Session Settings dialog The following information must be entered before a log session can start Thermometer e Select the model of the thermometer readout to use enter the serial num ber and select the session temperature scale from the available choices The reading resolution may also be selected e Select the COM port that the thermometer readout is connected to and choose the baud rate to use e Power up the thermometer readout and make sure it is connected to the selected COM port and set to the selected baud rate Click the
178. g to be specified The 1524 Handheld Thermometer readout has two logs demand log and auto log The demand log stores up to 25 readings while the auto log stores up to 15 000 readings For more details on the demand and auto logs see the 1524 User s Guide The Readings section allows the readings to be downloaded to be specified Selecting the Download all readings from log option indicates that all of the readings in the selected log should be downloaded Selecting the Download only readings with this label option allows only read ings that are assigned the label indicated below to be downloaded from the se lected log If this option is selected a list of current labels is read in from the thermometer readout Use the drop down list to select the appropriate label 52 3 Downloading logged data Download options dialogs 3 3 3 Select the resolution to use to format the readings when they are written to the download file This value can be set between 0 and 3 digits places after deci mal point Select the method to use when writing the downloaded readings to a file using the options in the Files section Selecting the Write all readings into a single file option causes all of the down loaded readings to be written to one file Selecting the Separate readings by channel option causes all of the downloaded readings to be separated according to the channel that each reading was taken from and written into separate files
179. hannel Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate Channel Settings dialog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel and probe are read in from the thermometer readout The Channel Settings dialogs are described in detail in Section 4 4 2 6 1529 Chub E4 PRT Thermistor Chan nel Settings Dialog and Section 4 4 2 7 1529 Chub E4 Thermocouple Channel Settings Dialog Misc tab Select the Misc tab to view and or modify other miscellaneous thermometer readout settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Misc Battery 100 charge remaining Keypad lockout Figure 59 1529 Chub E4 Settings Misc tab The Battery indicator displays the remaining charge available in the battery Select the setting for the lamp on the thermometer readout s display using the Lamp drop down list The lamp can be set to one of the following settings e Off 89 User s Guide 90 4 4 2 6 To prevent the buttons on the front panel of the thermometer readout from be ing used to view and or modify thermometer readout settings check the Key pad lockout box Leaving this box unchecked allows the buttons on the front panel to be used to view and or modify thermometer readout settings 1529 Chub E4 PRT thermistor channel settings dialog The 1529 Chub E4 PRT Thermistor Channel Settings dialog displays informa tion about the selected PRT Thermistor channel Channel 1 Settings g r Cha
180. hannel For TC probe types the available conversion types are e Thermocouple Type e Volts Refer to the Report of Calibration for the probe for information on the conver sion type that the probe was calibrated for If the selected conversion type requires coefficients or other settings the Con version Settings button is enabled Click the Conversion Settings button to dis play the dialog for the selected conversion type Otherwise the Conversion Settings button is disabled A Note The conversion settings are not written to the thermometer readout until the Apply or OK button is clicked on this dialog Select the type of reference junction compensation to use on this channel using the RJC type drop down list Available choices are Internal and External If Ex ternal is chosen as the RJC type the external RJC temperature must be entered in the RJC temperature box Enter the external RJC temperature value in the RJC temperature box This box is disabled if the RJC type is set to Internal A Note The RJC temperature value must always be in C 83 User s Guide 84 4 4 1 6 2 4 4 2 Misc tab Select the Misc tab to view and or modify other probe settings Probe Misc Resolution 3 y MINOP fo MAXOP Exclusively lock probe to channel Figure 54 1523 1524 Thermocouple Channel Settings Misc tab Select the resolution for the readings for this probe using the Resolution drop down list The re
181. hannels If the Scan channels only option is selected the thermometer readout will be set to scan through each of the enabled channels in the Scan channels list Select the channel to set as the primary channel using the Primary channel drop down list This list indicates the channel number module name and mod ule input number for all channels on the thermometer readout The primary channel setting is only enabled if the scan mode setting is set to the Primary channel only or the Alternate scan primary channels option Select the channels to include in the thermometer readout s scan sequence The Scan channels list indicates the channel number module name and module in put number for all channels on the thermometer readout Each channel can be enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking the box next to the channel number independent of all other channels The Scan channels list is only en 100 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 4 4 4 3 5 abled if the scan mode setting is set to either the Alternate scan primary chan nels or the Scan channels only option To include all channels in the scan sequence click the Enable All button This causes the box next to every channel to be checked To exclude all channels from the scan sequence click the Disable All button This causes the box next to every channel to be unchecked Modules tab Select the Modules tab to view a list of modules currently attached to the 156
182. hermometer readout For more informa tion on using the IR dongle please refer to Section 6 13 Using an IR Dongle with Log Ware After the model COM port baud rate and or IR settings are configured click the Test Communication button to make sure communication with the ther mometer readout is successful At this time the thermometer readout must be connected to the COM port on the computer using a null modem cable or if the IR dongle is being used the IR dongle must be connected to the selected COM port and the dongle must be aligned with the thermometer readout s IR port For more information please refer to the thermometer s User s Guide When testing communication with the thermometer readout there are three possible results e The thermometer readout is communicating at the correct baud rate on the selected COM port e The thermometer readout is communicating but possibly at the wrong baud rate or the thermometer readout model does not match the selected model e The thermometer readout failed to communicate at all Check the COM port and baud rate settings make sure the cable is a null modem cable and make sure the thermometer readout is plugged in and turned on If us ing the IR dongle make sure the dongle is connected to the selected COM port and the dongle is aligned properly with the thermometer readout s IR port After all of the settings on this dialog are configured and communication with the thermometer
183. hermometer readout is con nected using the COM port drop down list Only COM ports that the operating system reports as being available can be used The following symbols are used to show the status of each COM port e Y _ Indicates a COM port that is currently available e y Indicates the COM port that is currently selected by LogWare d Indicates a COM port that is currently being used by another appli cation e fx Indicates an IR port virtual COM port that is currently available ns Indicates an IR port virtual COM port that is currently selected by Log Ware e G Indicates an IR port virtual COM port that is currently being used by another application Note For a real time log session LogWare requires the use of one COM port An IR port virtual COM port cannot be selected as the port to use 2 Real time logging Log session settings dialog Select the baud rate that the computer should use to communicate over the COM port with the thermometer readout using the Baud rate drop down list The baud rate setting of the thermometer readout must be set to the same value as this setting For best results use the maximum allowable baud rate setting when possible After the model COM port and baud rate settings are configured click the Test Communication button to make sure Log Ware is able to communicate with the thermometer readout At this time the thermometer readout must be connected to the COM port
184. hh mm ss Scamning tab Select the Scanning tab to view and or modify scan settings Filtering Display Timing Scanning Channel Setup Scan Channels Scan Enable On yijiv V Channel 2 B LE fi Y Channel 3 siii a C Channel 4 Alternate Reference Off z Reference Channel 2 y Check each channel to add to the scan sequence Figure 132 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Scanning tab Use the Scan Enable drop down list to select whether scanning is enabled On or disabled Off If Scan Enable is Off Repeat Count Alternate Reference and Reference Channel are not applicable and are disabled and only one channel can be selected in the Scan Channels list The Repeat Count determines how many times a channel is measured before the instrument continues to the next channel to be measured If Scan Enable is Off this setting is not applicable and is disabled Use the Alternate Reference drop down list to select whether the reference channel is automatically measured after each individual channel is measured If this setting is Off the Reference Channel is not applicable and is disabled If Scan Enable is Off this setting is not applicable and is disabled When the Alternate Reference is enabled On this setting determines which channel shall be used for the reference If Scan Enable or Alternate Reference is Off this setting is not applicable and is disabled 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs
185. ia ks Syeda ae aM DOE A 128 44 3 12 2 Channels tabs eoe a aaa eee ea A GR nas 128 44 3 12 3 Calibration tabs ss ee kee ri A A Ree eee 129 4 4 3 13 2568 REDS Module Settings gt ss ss sarera sera e a ee ee 30 d443 18 1 General a a A Ba a A eh das A 131 43 13 27 Channels tab x52 5 08 tee ada id c 132 4 43 13 3 Calibration tabs sce Giese ri a he RE PR adsl Edw OET 132 44 3 14 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings dialog 33 43 04 1 Probeabo eaea aa peg kee ee RR gO REE dR de a RU alu bce 134 4 4 3 1560 Black Stack Thermocouple Channel Settings dialog 35 AAS ADA Probetabs 4 5 0 ar id e a A 136 1575A Super Thermometer Settings o o 137 4 4 4 Filtering tb s paaa a a A AA n 39 444 2 Sampling tab ee oa Sele ans Glare ad Go amp Bee ade way Wad e A A 40 4443 Measurementitab 2 5 5 sige ro ee ee dee oe en a Pea 42 AAAA CHOME vocoder da Bee Ay Ge Boe eke ole eee ee a 43 A4A45 Calibration tabs 5 665065 6 ede eee as oa RS Be Uh a 45 4 4 4 6 1575A Super Thermometer 2575 Mighty Mux Channel Settings 46 AAAGL Probetabe cuco o blak Toe SRE Ree ene AA ele 147 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings dialog 148 AAS O a asd ea vo eA wd dans oA dhe ek A Sea doh ws Seon Rea ae 50 AAS2 gt Sampling tape oscar aod Ras Be a be BR ee da ds 51 iii iv AMS Measurement tab s ser o aria Sine Wes We a ee ks BOE 53 WASA Channels tab sic ai be
186. ial number box indicates the serial number assigned to this thermometer readout The Identification box indicates the model number serial number and firmware version installed in this thermometer readout The Channels box indi cates the total number of input channels on this thermometer readout The filtering settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the Filtering tab The display settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the Display tab The timing settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the Timing tab The scan settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the Scanning tab The Channel Setup tab displays a list of channels and allows access to probe settings and channel settings dialogs The settings on each of these tabs are de scribed in detail in the following sections For more detail on these settings please refer to the thermometer readout s User s Guide 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 6 1 If any of the settings on the 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Settings dialog are passcode protected a message appears at the bottom of the appropri ate tab and the Edit button is displayed The controls for the passcode protected settings are disabled To edit the protected settings click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the controls are enabled and the values may be changed After modifying any of the settings on this dialog
187. ialog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel are read in from the thermometer readout The Channel Settings dialog is described in detail in Section 4 4 3 14 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Set tings Dialog Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify module calibration informa tion General Channels Calibration Calibration date Edit O ADJ 100 ADJ 400 ADJ WARNING Changing these values voids the module calibration Calibration parameters are passcode protected Figure 75 2560 SPRT Module Settings Calibration tab The settings on the Calibration tab may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the Calibration tab and the Edit button is dis played The other controls on this tab are disabled To edit the calibration pa rameters click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the calibration parame ter controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button Caution Do not change these values unless this module has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values located on the latest Report of Calibration for this module Changing these values voids the current calibration Select the date this module was last ca
188. ices model number serial number and firmware version installed in this module The Channels box indicates the num ber of input channels on this module General module settings can be viewed and or modified by selecting the Gen eral tab The Channels tab displays a list of the channels on this module and al lows access to channel settings dialogs The module calibration information can be viewed and or modified by selecting the Calibration tab After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new module settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dia log closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the module settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 13 1 to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the module settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog General tab Select the General tab to view and or modify general module settings General l Chann
189. icients and any other information specific to that con version type Conversion configuration files have an extension that matches the type of con version as described below Conversion Type File Extension Callendar Van Dusen cvd High Temperature PRT pt IPTS 68 168 ITS 90 190 W T90 w90 Polynomial ply Thermistor thr Thermocouple Polynomial tcp Thermocouple Table tet Thermocouple Type tex 7 Files Data files 7 2 7 2 1 A Note Opening a configuration file overwrites the current conversion set tings Conversion configuration files can be opened and or saved from the appropriate conversion settings dialog For more information on conversion settings dialogs please refer to Section 9 Conversion Settings Dialogs Data files Data files are created by LogWare either during a real time log session or when data is downloaded from a thermometer readout Log Ware creates the following types of data files e Output files Created during real time log session and contains acquired data for a single channel e Alarm Log file Created during real time log session and contains infor mation about alarms e Download files Created when data is downloaded from a thermometer readout Warning Do not attempt to manually modify the contents of any data file Files that have been modified may not be able to be read by LogWare Output file LogWare saves the readings acquired during a real time log se
190. il new measurement is ready when applicable JV Always prompt to select printer before printing JV Always print statistics with readings Always prompt to connect thermometer Show gridlines on graphs Cancel Y Enable communication debugging i Figure 149 LogWare Options Dialog The Options option is disabled while a real time log session is running 193 User s Guide 194 5 6 4 1 The following sections describe in detail each of the LogWare Options settings After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the OK button to save the new settings and close the dialog To close this dialog without saving new settings click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog General tab The General tab displays options pertaining to the behavior of the LogWare software in general General Eolders Tools Admin Passcode IV Show Log Session Settings dialog on start up V Load default configuration file automatically Default configuration file C Program Files FlukeHart Scientific Logware II V Show Log Session Settings dialog after closing log session Prompt to synchronize real time log session Wait until new measurement is ready when applicable JV Always prompt to select printer before printing JV Always print statistics with readings Always prompt to connect thermometer TF Show gridlines on graphs IV Enable
191. illed with the current coefficient values Enter the voltage of the thermocouple probe in millivolts at 25 C from the Report of Calibration in the mV 25C box If this value is not applicable to the thermometer readout this box is disabled Enter the values for all thermocouple polynomial coefficients from the Report of Calibration in the boxes provided If any coefficients are not used leave the boxes blank or set the values to 0 0 The actual number of boxes displayed de pends on the thermometer readout being used Select the Open button to display the Windows Open dialog to open a previ ously saved configuration file which contains Thermocouple Polynomial coeffi 9 Conversion settings dialogs Thermocouple Table Settings dialog 9 10 cients Select the Save As button to display the Windows Save As dialog to save the current Thermocouple Polynomial coefficients to a configuration file Click the OK button to accept the current coefficients and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog Thermocouple Table Settings dialog The Thermocouple Table Settings dialog allows the Number of points and Tem perature and Voltage values to be entered Thermocouple Table Settings m Thermocouple Table Settings Open Number of points fio y Save As Temperature Voltage 1 f2000
192. in the 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout can hold up to 100 readings To clear all readings from the demand log click the Clear Demand Log button The Auto log progress bar indicates the current state of the auto log The auto log in the 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout can hold up to 8 160 readings To clear all readings from the auto log click the Clear Auto Log button To refresh the log status information on this dialog click the Refresh button The log status is read in from the thermometer readout again and the dialog is updated To close this dialog click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 1560 Black Stack log status dialog The Model 1560 Black Stack Thermometer readout stores the values of up to the last 1 000 readings taken in the thermometer s memory and is referred to by LogWare as the history log LogWare can display the current status of the 3 Downloading logged data Log status dialogs history log When the Log Status option in the Download menu is selected and the 1560 Black Stack Thermometer readout is selected on the Select Model dia log the 1560 Black Stack Log Status dialog is displayed 1560 Black Stack Log status 1560 Black Stack Log Status Refresh History log 100 00 full Figure 38 1560 Black Stack Log Status dialog The history log progress bar indicates the current state of the history log The histor
193. ings on each of these tabs are described in detail in the follow ing sections For more details on these settings please refer to the thermometer readout s User s Guide After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings 97 User s Guide 98 4 4 3 1 LogWare has a feature that causes all of the thermometer readout settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new settings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Filtering tab Select the Filtering tab to view and or modify the filter settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Modules IV Enable moving average filter 4 readings Figure 68 1560 Black Stack settings Filtering tab Check the Enable moving average filter box to enable the moving average filter This filter is sometimes also called a sliding window filter When this box is chec
194. ings since the statistics were last reset Click the Reset button to reset the statistical values Click the Close button to close this dialog Previous log session The Previous Log Session window allows multiple output files or download files to be opened and viewed This window is divided into three main sections 2 Real time logging Previous log session channels statistics and graph These three sections can be resized by dragging the bars that divide the sections with the mouse sax Previous Log Session 1 E 5 o x y Channels Statistics Statistics for Channel 3 Channel 1 Channel2 Channel 3 Channel 4 3 1 2002 1 08 12PM 71 5525 F High 3 1 2002 1 08 16PM 71 5394 F High 3 1 2002 1 08 20PM 71 5323 F High 3 1 2002 1 08 24PM 71 5606 F High 3 1 2002 1 08 28 PM 71 5273 F High Standard deviation 4 38066 F Readings Figure 23 Previous Log Session window A Previous Log Session window can be opened by selecting the Open Previ ously Logged Data File option in the View menu or by selecting one of the files in the Most Recently Used MRU section at the bottom of the View menu Up to 8 Previous Log Session windows can be open at a time When selecting the Open Previously Logged Data File option the Windows Open dialog is displayed The Config folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for configuration files on the LogWare Options dia
195. ion Channels 2566 fa 9566 Pros 1 2566419566 fi 2 Channels Calibration Channels Channel Settings 2 258963 3 354231 4 785632 5 256587 6 258961 7 257423 8 254215 9 335896 10 259635 11 521598 12 259687 Help Cancel e Figure 95 2566 TCS Module Settings dialog The Model box indicates the model number of this module The Serial box in dicates the serial number assigned to this module The Identification box indi cates the module name number of devices model number serial number and firmware version installed in this module The Channels box indicates the num ber of input channels on this module The Channels tab displays a list of the channels on this module and allows ac cess to channel settings dialogs The module calibration information can be viewed and or modified by selecting the Calibration tab After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new module settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 11 1 button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dia log closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the module settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be usef
196. ion 2 Real Time Logging for more information 225 7 Files Configuration files 7 1 7 1 1 Files This section describes all of the files that LogWare creates and or uses The first section describes LogWare s configuration files and the second section de scribes LogWare s data files Configuration files Configuration files are intended to facilitate the configuration process By de fault all configuration files are saved to the Config folder or the folder that is specified for configuration files on the LogWare Options dialog LogWare sup ports many types of configuration files e Real Time Log Session configuration files e Alarm configuration files e Conversion configuration files Warning Do not attempt to manually modify the contents of any configu ration file Files that have been modified may not be able to be read by Log Ware Log session configuration file The log session configuration file is used to save the current real time log ses sion settings Warning Do not attempt to manually modify the contents of any configu ration file Files that have been modified may not be able to be read by Log Ware A log session configuration file contains ALL configuration information re quired to start a real time log session This information includes the thermome ter information communication settings sample interval settings start and end log session settings channel statistics and alarm settings
197. ion is set to Run or Stop the Sample n setting is not applicable and is disabled If the filter type is set to Sample n the Sample n setting is enabled If the sample action is set to Sample n enter the number of samples in the Sam ple n box The Sample n setting can be set to any value between 1 and 32 000 The Sample timing controls allow the thermometer readout s sample timing set tings to be viewed and or modified The sample timing settings include the Sample interval Integration time and Conversion time Enter the sample interval value in the Sample interval box provided or use the up down buttons The sample interval can be set to any value between 2 and 99 999 seconds Note The sample interval must be greater than or equal to the integration time which in turn must be greater than or equal to the conversion time If the sample interval is set to a value that is less than the current integration time the integration time and conversion time settings are automatically set to match the sample interval setting Enter the integration time value in the Integration time box provided or use the up down buttons The integration time can be set to any value between 2 and 9 999 seconds Note The integration time must be greater than or equal to the conver sion time If the integration time is set to a value that is less than the cur rent conversion time the conversion time setting is automatically set to match the integration time s
198. ions COM port and baud rate settings e Interval between readings and interval between scan sequences e Start log session and End log session settings e Channel configurations including statistical and alarm settings In addition to allowing configuration files to be saved and opened Log Ware optionally allows one configuration file to be opened automatically every time LogWare runs This configuration file can be specified in one of two ways us ing the LogWare Options dialog or using the Log Session Settings dialog To specify the default configuration file using the LogWare Options dialog Select the Options option in the Tools menu The LogWare Options dialog is displayed Select the General tab Check the Show Log Session Settings dialog on start up check box Check the Open default configuration file automatically check box oy Oe OP ee Click the Browse button to select the configuration file to open or type the path and filename in the Default configuration file box 7 Click the OK button to save the changes A Note The real time log session settings must already be saved to a config uration file in order to accomplish these steps To specify the default configuration file using the Log Session Settings dialog 1 Select the Setup option in the Datalog menu 2 The Log Session Settings dialog is displayed 3 Fill in all of the information on this dialog 4 Click the Set as Default button A prompt is displa
199. ious Log Session window Click on an item to open that file in a new Previous Log Session window 179 User s Guide 180 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 1 1 Graph menu The Graph menu provides options for customizing graph settings changing the graph trace colors accessing graph zooming features and printing the graph Graph Settings Restore Default Settings Trace Color Zoom In Restore Print Graph Figure 141 Graph Menu Graph settings dialog The Graph Settings option displays the Graph Settings dialog The Graph Settings dialog allows many of the graph settings to be changed in cluding titles axis settings grids colors trend lines and legends The Graph Settings option applies to the current log session window The Graph Settings option and toolbar button are only enabled if a real time or previous log session window is open The following sections describe in detail each of the customizable graph settings After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply Now or OK button to apply the new settings to the graph If the Apply Now button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes To close this dialog without saving new settings click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Titles tab 5 Menus Graph menu The Titles tab can be used to enter the titles to appear on the top bottom
200. is channel is due for recalibration using the drop down calen dar or by entering the date Enter the values for the calibration constants in the boxes provided The cali bration constants required by a PRT Thermistor channel are CO C100 C400 COK C10K and C100K The values of these constants should be located on the Report of Calibration for this channel 93 User s Guide 94 4 4 2 7 1529 Chub E4 thermocouple channel settings The 1529 Chub E4 Thermocouple Channel Settings dialog displays informa tion about the selected thermocouple channel Channel 3 Settings m Channel 3 Settings Probe Calibration Probe serial number 365234 RJC type RJC temperature External y 0 012 E Conversion type Thermocouple Type y Conversion Settings Cancel Help Figure 64 1529 Chub E4 Thermocouple channel settings dialog Some or all of the settings on this dialog may be passcode protected If so a message appears at the bottom of the Probe tab and or Calibration tab and the Edit button is displayed The protected controls are disabled To edit the pro tected settings click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the ther mometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the protected controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply b
201. isabled until a log session has been completely configured The P button on the toolbar corresponds to the Start menu option Please refer to Section 2 Real Time Logging for more details on a real time log session Stop The Stop option stops the current real time log session This option is only en abled when a real time log session is running A log session may be stopped at any time by selecting this option The W button on the toolbar corresponds to the Stop menu option When selecting the Stop option a message is displayed to confirm stopping the log session 15 User s Guide 2 2 4 2 2 5 2 3 Close The Close option closes the current real time log session window This option is only enabled once the real time log session has stopped and the log session window is still open The Al button on the toolbar corresponds to the Close menu option Mute all alarms The Mute All Alarms option can be used to mute any audible alarms associated with the current real time log session When the alarms are muted a check mark appears next to this option Muting the alarms does not prevent alarm events from happening The 18 button on the toolbar corresponds to the Mute All Alarms menu option When alarms are muted the toolbar button appears as ct Log session settings dialog The Log Session Settings dialog is used to configure the real time log session settings These settings include the thermometer readout
202. isplay on the graph using the Color drop down lists The selected color for each statistical line applies to that statistical line for all sets of data Select the limit alarm lines options to display on the graph using the Limit Lines options To display the high alarm line check the High check box To display the low alarm line check the Low check box A Note Changing the low and high limit line settings on this dialog DOES NOT change the low and high alarm settings entered on the Alarm Set tings dialog and therefore does not affect the alarm events options These settings are only used to display the alarm lines on the graph Only change these settings if absolutely necessary Select the line style for the limit alarm lines using the Line drop down list A fill pattern can also be selected using the Fill drop down list Select the color of the limit alarm lines and the fill pattern using the Color drop down list Select the Fill Opposite check box to fill the area between the High and Low limit alarm lines with the selected pattern If this option is not checked the ar eas above the High limit value and below the Low limit value are filled in with the selected pattern Enter the text to appear as a label on the High and Low limit alarm lines in the High Label and Low Label boxes By default these labels are set to High Alarm and Low Alarm respectively Note Unlike statistical lines the graph can only display o
203. ith LogWare After the model COM port baud rate and or IR settings are configured click the Test Communication button to make sure communication with the ther mometer readout is successful At this time the thermometer readout must be connected to the COM port on the computer using a null modem cable or if the IR dongle is being used the IR dongle must be connected to the selected COM port and the dongle must be aligned with the thermometer readout s IR port For more information please refer to the thermometer readout s User s Guide When testing communication with the thermometer readout there are three possible results e The thermometer readout is communicating at the correct baud rate on the selected COM port e The thermometer readout is communicating but possibly at the wrong baud rate or the thermometer readout model does not match the selected model e The thermometer readout failed to communicate at all Check the COM port and baud rate settings make sure the cable is a null modem cable and make sure the thermometer readout is plugged in and turned on If us ing the IR dongle make sure the dongle is connected to the selected COM port and the dongle is aligned properly with the thermometer readout s IR port After all of the settings on this dialog are configured and communication with the thermometer readout is successful click the OK button to accept the set tings and continue Click the Cancel button c
204. k the Save button For more details about the real time log session configuration file refer to Section 7 1 1 Log Session Configuration File Real time log session configuration files can also be saved by selecting the Save As button on the Log Session Settings dialog 5 Menus Datalog menu 5 1 4 1 5 1 4 2 5 2 5 2 1 The Save As option and toolbar button are disabled while a real time log ses sion window is open Print The Print option allows the current graph or log file to be printed The Print op tion has 2 submenu options Readings and Graph The submenu options are disabled if there is no real time or previous log session window open Readings The Readings option allows the output file for the currently selected channel to be printed This option applies to both real time and previous log sessions Graph The Graph option allows the graph in the currently selected window to be printed This option applies to both real time and previous log sessions The graph can also be printed by selecting the Print Graph option in the Graph menu Exit The Exit option closes the LogWare Software The Exit option is disabled while a real time log session window is open Datalog menu The Datalog menu provides options for working with configuring starting stopping and closing a real time log session Setup Start Mute All Alarms Figure 138 Datalog menu Setup The Setup option displays the Log Session Se
205. ked the number of readings to average size of window must be entered in the box provided Enabling this option causes the thermometer readout to display the average of the last n readings on a specific channel as the current reading for that channel If this feature is disabled the most recent measure ment on each channel is displayed as the current reading The moving average filter can be set to any value between 1 and 10 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 2 Sampling tab Select the Sampling tab to view and or modify sampling settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Modules Units c Sample interval Scan sequence delay f2 seconds y E minutes y Figure 69 1560 Black Stack Settings Sampling tab Select the units to use when displaying readings in temperature using the Units drop down list Temperature readings can be displayed in either C F or K This setting applies to all channels that are configured to display readings in temperature Select the time interval between subsequent measurements using the Sample in terval controls The sample interval can be set to any value from 0 to 32 767 seconds 0 to 546 minutes or 0 to 9 hours Note Setting the sample interval to O seconds or 1 second is equivalent to setting it to 2 seconds because the 1560 Black Stack cannot sample at a rate faster than once every 2 seconds This is the default behavior of the 1560 Black Stack Thermometer read
206. ken once every minute or once every five minutes This can be accomplished using Log Ware by enabling the Interval between scan se quences option The Interval between scan sequences settings are then enabled A scan sequence is defined by LogWare as taking a single reading on each en abled channel Select the interval to use LogWare allows this interval to be set anywhere between 1 minute and 60 hours at 1 minute or 1 hour increments Leaving this feature disabled causes LogWare to begin a new scan sequence immediately following completion of the previous scan sequence The Start log session box indicates the current setting for starting a log session By default this setting is configured to start a log session immediately after the Start button is clicked LogWare may optionally be configured to start a log ses sion unattended on any date at any time To set the start date and time click the Delayed Start button The Delayed Start Date Time dialog is displayed Please refer to Section 2 3 4 Delayed Start Date Time Dialog for details on using this dialog Clicking the Reset button resets the start date time setting The log session will start immediately after the Start button is clicked The End log session settings allow the log session to be configured to automati cally stop logging at a certain time or after a certain number of readings By de fault a log session will continue until manually stopped by the user Select the method
207. l between subsequent measurements using the Sample in terval drop down list The sample interval can be set to any one of the follow ing settings 0 1 0 2 or 0 5 seconds 1 2 5 10 or 30 seconds 1 2 5 10 or 30 minutes e hour Note Setting the sample interval to 0 1 or 0 2 seconds causes the 1529 to enter a special fast sampling mode Please refer to the 1529 Chub E4 User s Guide for more information on using sample interval settings of less than 0 5 seconds Select the decimal format character using the Decimal format drop down list The 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout supports using either the period or comma as the decimal separator Select the date format using the Date format drop down list The 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout supports displaying the date in one of four formats e MM DD YY e MM DD YYYY e DD MM YY 87 User s Guide 88 4 4 2 3 4 4 2 4 e DD MM YYYY Select the time format using the Time format drop down list The 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout supports displaying the time in either 12 hour or 24 hour format Checking the Stamp all measurements with date and time option causes the 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout to always send date and time information with the measurement when querying measurements using an RS 232 IR or IEEE interface Measurement tab Select the Measurement tab to view and or modify measurement related set tings Filtering Sampling Measurem
208. l tab Select the General tab to view and or modify general module settings General Channels Calibration Excitation current Resistance range 2 pA v Auto v Front row wires Rear row wires 4 wire y 4 wire hd Figure 89 2564 THRS Module Settings General tab Select the excitation current for this module using the Excitation current drop down list The 2564 module can use either a 2 uA or a 10 uA excitation current or Auto This setting applies to all channels on this module Select the resistance range for this module using the Resistance range drop down list The 2564 module allows the selection of either Auto High or Low This setting applies to all channels on this module Select the front row wires option for this module using the Front row wires drop down list The 2564 module allows the selection of either 4 wire or 3 wire This setting applies only to the four channels on the front row of this module Select the rear row wires option for this module using the Rear row wires drop down list The 2564 module allows the selection of either 4 wire or 3 wire This setting applies only to the four channels on the rear row of this module 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 9 2 4 4 3 9 3 Channels tab Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels on this module and to access the channel settings dialogs to view and or modify channel specific settings General Channels Calibratio
209. l time log session to start at a predefined date and time To set the delayed start date and time 1 Select the Setup option in the Datalog menu 2 The Log Session Settings dialog is displayed 205 User s Guide 6 3 206 Select the Log Session tab Click the Delayed Start button The Delayed Start Date Time dialog is displayed A Ho Pp Y Choose the date and time that the real time log session should start Since the computer s clock will be used to determine when the log ses sion starts make sure the computer s clock is accurate Click the OK but ton to accept the selected date and time Note To cause the real time log session to start immediately when click ing the Start button after having set a delayed start date and time click the Reset button 7 Click the Start button on the Log Session Settings dialog to start the log session 8 LogWare displays a message indicating the date and time the real time log session will start 9 To cancel the delayed start click the Cancel button at any time After a real time log session ends the delayed start time is reset so that the next real time log session will start immediately when the Start button on the Log Session Settings dialog is clicked or when the Start option in the Datalog menu is selected To set a new delayed start time for the next real time log session follow the steps above Note Every effort has been made to make the real time log session t
210. layed depends on the thermometer readout being used Select the Open button to display the Windows Open dialog to open a previ ously saved configuration file which contains Polynomial coefficients Select the Save As button to display the Windows Save As dialog to save the current Polynomial coefficients to a configuration file Click the OK button to accept the current coefficients and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 9 Conversion settings dialogs W T90 Settings dialog 9 7 9 8 W T90 Settings dialog The W T90 Settings dialog allows the RTPW coefficient to be entered W T90 Settings RAT PW 100 001211313 Save As Open Figure 178 W T90 Settings dialog If the W T90 coefficients were read in from the thermometer readout the boxes are filled with the current coefficient values Enter the RTPW coefficient from the Report of Calibration in the RTPW box This box must contain a valid value Select the Open button to display the Windows Open dialog to open a previ ously saved configuration file which contains W T90 coefficients Select the Save As button to display the Windows Save As dialog to save the current W T90 coefficients to a configuration file Click the OK button to accept the current coefficients and close this dialog Click the Canc
211. le such as a company logo or texture pattern behind the graph If any other option except None is selected the File and Browse button controls are enabled En ter the name of the file or browse for the filename using the Browse button 189 User s Guide Select the color palette to use using the Palette drop down list Using this drop down list choose a 16 color or 128 color palette for the screen All of the Color drop down lists for the graph settings use this palette to determine the available choices e 16 color palettes consist of 16 differentiated colors default pastel or grayscale e 128 color palettes always consist of the 16 colors from the default palette followed by 96 colors that vary according to the palette you select The graph reserves 16 additional colors for special graphic needs These col ors cannot be selected By default the 16 Default palette is selected A Note Selecting any other palette will invalidate the Trace Color option on the Log Session Settings dialog The Palette option should NOT be changed 5 5 1 6 Legend tab The Legend tab can be used to add a legend to the graph Titles Axis Fonts Trends Background Legend Legend Text y Position Size 2 2 E ls Figure 147 Graph Settings Legend tab Note To restore the legend settings to their default settings select the Re store Default Settings option in the Graph menu 190 5 Menus Graph me
212. librated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module Enter the values for the calibration constants in the boxes provided The cali bration constants required by the 2560 module are 0 ADJ 100 ADJ and 400 ADJ The values of these constants should be located on the Report of Calibra tion for this module 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 6 2561 HPRT Module Settings dialog The 2561 Module Settings dialog displays information about the 2561 module including model number serial number identification information and the number of channels on this module It also allows many module specific set tings to be viewed and or modified 2561 Module Settings 4 2561 Module Settings Model Serial Identification Channels 2561 al 9561 HPRT 1 2561 41956 2 General Channels Calibration Excitation current 3 ma y Cancel Hal ERT Help Figure 76 2561 HPRT Module Settings dialog The Model box indicates the model number of this module The Serial box in dicates the serial number assigned to this module The Identification box indi cates the module name number of devices model number serial number and firmware version installed in this module The Channels box indicates the num ber of input channels on this module General module settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the General ta
213. lick the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate channel settings di alog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel and probe are read in from the thermometer readout 75 User s Guide 76 4 4 1 3 Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify the thermometer readout s cal ibration settings Sampling Channels Calibration Misc Calibration date WARNING Changi i val 7 419 2008 voids the calibration L75_0HMS LO_OHMS Reference Value Reference Value f 0 0000 75 0000 0 2879 0 2162 400 0000 1 5079 75 0000 Figure 47 1523 1524 Settings Calibration tab CAUTION DO NOT CHANGE THESE VALUES UNLESS THIS READ OUT HAS BEEN RECALIBRATED OR UNLESS THESE VALUES DO NOT MATCH THE VALUES LOCATED ON THE LATEST REPORT OF CALIBRATION CHANGING THESE VALUES VOIDS THE CURRENT CALIBRATION Select the date this readout was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration Enter the reference and offset values for each calibration range in the grid The calibration ranges are indicated in the first row of the grid Each calibration range can have up to 4 adjustment pairs consisting of a reference and an offset value Reference and offset values for unused adjustment pairs must be left blank These values can be found on the Report of Calibration for the read
214. log Toolbar 10 Datalog menu 9 15 175 195 Delayed Start Date Time 23 26 206 Download Logged Data 47 50 51 55 177 218 231 Download Options 47 50 52 177 219 Download menu 9 47 177 Downloaded Files 234 237 263 Index E Edit 85 90 94 104 107 111 114 118 121 124 129 133 134 136 138 146 150 157 Edit Protected Options 217 End Log 206 Enter Passcode 200 210 217 Exit 175 Exponential 139 151 F File Toolbar 10 File Viewer window 35 39 234 235 237 File menu 9 13 173 Filter type 139 151 Filtering 86 98 139 150 Fonts 185 G General 103 106 109 113 116 128 131 194 Granularity 188 Graph Settings 36 45 180 Graph Title 181 Graph Toolbar 10 Graph menu 9 180 H Help Toolbar 11 Help menu 9 203 High Range 239 240 High Temperature PRT Settings 245 High Temperature PRT coefficients 245 l IPTS 68 Settings 242 264 IPTS 68 coefficients 242 IR dongle 4 49 68 220 221 261 IR port 20 49 68 220 221 261 ITS 90 Settings 239 ITS 90 coefficients 240 Interval between readings 22 Interval between scan sequences 23 32 K Keypad lockout 90 L Left Title 182 Legend tab 190 Limit Lines 188 Log Session Settings 7 13 15 16 18 31 33 173 175 194 195 205 207 208 224 Log Session window 16 31 33 176 Log Status 47 48 60 61 177 218 LogWare Options 193 208 215 217 Logging Labels 65 66 69 70 192 2
215. log again select the Setup option in the Datalog menu This dialog has three tabs Thermometer Log Session and Channels All of the information on each of these tabs must be configured before a real time log session can be started The following sections describe in detail each of the set tings on these tabs Once the log session has been completely configured the settings can be saved to a configuration file by clicking the Save As button If these same settings may be used again at a later date saving the settings to a configuration file greatly reduces the amount of time required to get a log session started When clicking the Save As button the Windows Save As dialog is displayed The Config folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for configuration files on the LogWare Options dialog Real time log session configuration files are saved with a rls extension To cancel saving a configu ration file click the Cancel button Otherwise enter the filename for the config uration file and click the Save button For more details about the real time log session configuration file refer to Section 7 1 1 Log Session Configuration File Real time log session configuration files can also be saved by selecting the Save As option in the File menu 17 User s Guide 18 A log session settings configuration file that has been saved previously can be opened by clicking the Open button Note When opening a
216. log is checked the Log Session Settings dialog is automatically displayed To prevent LogWare from displaying the Log Session Settings dialog after the log session window is closed uncheck this option For more details please re fer to Section 5 6 4 Options 2 Real time logging Real time log session 2 4 1 Once the log session has been stopped the output file which contains all of the acquired readings can be opened by selecting the Open Previously Logged Data File option in the View menu For more details on opening previously logged data files please refer to Section 5 4 7 Open Previously Logged Data File Channels grid The Channels grid is located in the upper left corner of the log session window and displays the most recent data for each enabled channel This data includes the channel name date time and value and scale of the most recent reading the current alarm state and whether or not the trace for the channel is currently dis played on the graph The color of the data in the Channels grid matches the se lected trace color for that channel The currently selected channel is highlighted The first column in the Channels grid indicates the channel names as entered on the Log Session Settings dialog The second and third columns indicate the date and time that the last reading was taken on each channel The fourth col umn indicates the last reading value and scale on each channel The fifth col umn indicates the current
217. logs 4 4 3 7 1 tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the module settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog General tab Select the General tab to view and or modify general module settings General Channels Calibration Excitation current Resistance range fi m y Auto y Front row wires Rear row wires 4 wire l 4 wire Figure 81 2562 PRTS Module Settings General tab Select the excitation current for this module using the Excitation current drop down list The 2562 module can use either a 1 mA or a 1 414 mA excita tion current This setting applies to all channels on this module Select the resistance range for this module using the Resistance range drop down list The 2562 module allows the selection of either Auto High or Low This setting applies to all channels on this module Select the front row wires option for this module using the Front row wires drop down list The 2562 module allows the selection of either 4 wire or 3 wire This setting applies only to the four channels on the front row of this module Select the rear row wires option for this module using the Rear row
218. lose this dialog and abort using the selected feature Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 4 Tools Logging labels dialogs 4 3 4 3 1 Logging labels dialogs Log Ware provides a tool to view and or modify the labels that the thermometer readout assigns to readings that are stored in the thermometer readout s log s This tool is accessible by selecting the Logging Labels option in the Tools menu The following sections describe the dialogs for each of the thermometer readouts that support this feature 1523 Handheld logging label dialog The Model 1523 Handheld Thermometer readout can store readings into a log called the demand log When readings are stored in the log a label can be as signed to each reading to indicate the reason purpose or to otherwise identify the reading s LogWare provides a tool that can be used to view and or modify the current logging label When the Logging Labels option in the Tools menu is selected and the 1523 Thermometer readout is selected on the Select Model di alog the 1523 Logging Label dialog is displayed 1523 Logging Label l 1523 Logging Label Reset Label name D EMAND Figure 41 1523 Logging Label dialog When the 1523 Logging Label dialog is displayed the current label name is read in from the thermometer readout The 1523 Handheld Thermometer readout has a single logging label for the de mand log The Label name
219. lternate scanner channel 1 scanner channels User defined scanner sequence If the scanner sequence mode is set to Scanner channels only Input 2 and scan ner channels Alternate input 2 scanner channels or Alternate scanner channel 1 scanner channels the Seq channels setting must be set and is enabled If the scanner sequence mode is set to User defined scanner sequence the user de fined scanner sequence settings must be set and are enabled If the scanner sequence mode is set to Scanner channels only Input 2 and scan ner channels Alternate input 2 scanner channels or Alternate scanner channel 1 scanner channels enter the number of scanner channels to include in the scanner sequence in the Seq channels box provided or use the up down buttons If the scanner sequence mode is set to User defined scanner sequence the user defined scanner sequence can be configured using the Steps Scanner se quence and Step channel controls Enter the number of steps in the user defined scanner sequence in the Steps box provided or use the up down buttons The number of steps in a user defined scanner sequence can be set to any value between 1 and 100 The Scanner sequence list indicates the current channel assignments for each step in the user defined scanner sequence To change the current channel as signed to a step select the step in the list The current channel assignment ap pears in the Step channel control Select the channel assignment
220. mA excitation current This setting applies to all channels on this module Channels tab Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels on this module and to access the channel settings dialogs to view and or modify channel specific settings General Channels Calibration Channels Channel Settings 2 369563 Figure 78 2561 HPRT Module Settings Channels tab 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 6 3 Select the channel to view and or modify from the Channels list This list indi cates the channel number with respect to this module and the serial number of the probe on each channel Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate Channel Settings dialog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel are read in from the thermometer readout The Channel Settings dialog is described in detail in Section 4 4 3 14 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Set tings Dialog Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify module calibration informa tion General Channels Calibration Calibration date 8 1 2001 Edit 04DJ 104DJ WARNING Changing these values voids the module calibration Calibration parameters are passcode protected Figure 79 2561 HPRT Module Settings Calibration tab The settings on the Calibration tab may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the Calibration tab and the
221. mation on using the File Viewer window Note If the data is being acquired using the Write all acquired data to the same file option the View Readings History feature displays all readings for all channels Note When viewing the output file while a real time log session is run ning the File Viewer window displays only the information that had been written to the file at the time the file was opened Click the Refresh button on the File Viewer window to update the file To see the statistics for the output file click the Statistics button on the File Viewer window The out put file can also be printed by clicking the Print button on the File Viewer window or by selecting the Print Readings option in the File menu Statistics list The Statistics list is located in the upper right corner of the log session window and displays statistical information for the currently selected channel The color of the statistics data matches the trace color for the selected channel Each of the statistical settings can be enabled or disabled by clicking the Settings but ton Only the enabled statistics are displayed in the Statistics list Please refer to Section 2 3 6 Statistics Settings Dialog for more information on the Statistics Settings dialog Clicking the Clear button resets all statistical values for the selected channel and begins calculating the statistical data again starting with the next reading acquired on the selected channel Graph
222. mometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the module settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button 127 User s Guide 128 4 4 3 12 1 4 4 3 12 2 Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog General tab Select the General tab to view and or modify general module settings General Channels Calibration Excitation current Resistance range 0 05 ma y Auto y Figure 101 2567 RTD Module Settings General tab Select the excitation current for this module using the Excitation current drop down list The 2567 module can use either a 0 05 mA or a 0 1 mA excita tion current This setting applies to all channels on this module Select the resistance range for this module using the Resistance range drop down list The 2567 module allows the selection of either Auto High or Low This setting applies to all channels on this module Channels tab Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels on this module and to access the channel settings dialogs to view and or modify channel specific settings General Channels Calibration Channels Channel Settings 2 258998 Figure 102 2567 RTD Module Settings Channels tab 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 12 3 Select the channel to view and or modify from the Channels list This list indi cates the channel numb
223. mometer readout and turn it on Make sure the IR dongle is connected to the selected COM port Contact an Applications Specialist or Cus tomer Service representative to purchase a compatible IR dongle LogWare is not designed to use built in IR ports A dongle must be used Make sure the path between the IR dongle and IR window on the thermometer readout is unobstructed Place IR dongle as close to IR window as possible Real Time Logging Problems LogWare beeps and the reading on a single channel is always 0 0 Poor communication Bad probe connection Probe coefficients not correct See Communication Problems above Make sure the probe on the channel exhibit ing this problem is properly connected If attempting to read temperature make sure the conversion coefficients for the probe have been properly into the correct channel 259 User s Guide Problem Possible Cause Solution LogWare beeps and the reading on a random channel is always 0 0 LogWare beeps and the reading on all chan nels is always 0 0 LogWare gets duplicate readings on a channel Cannot zoom or scroll graph Cannot print the readings or graph Scale of readings on one or more channels is incorrect Poor communication Computer may be too slow or not have enough resources available Poor communication Sample rate too fast By design Printer not installed Printer not connected or online Channel s not con
224. n Channels Channel Settings Figure 90 2564 THRS Module Settings Channels tab Select the channel to view and or modify from the Channels list This list indi cates the channel number with respect to this module and the serial number of the probe on each channel Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate channel settings di alog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel are read in from the thermometer readout The Channel Settings dialog is described in detail in Section 4 4 3 14 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings Dialog Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify module calibration informa tion General Channels Calibration Calibration date WARNING Changing these values voids the module calibration Calibration parameters are passcode protected Figure 91 2564 THRS Module Settings Calibration tab 117 User s Guide 118 4 4 3 10 The settings on the Calibration tab may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the Calibration tab and the Edit button is dis played The other controls on this tab are disabled To edit the calibration pa rameters click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the calibration parame ter controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain ena
225. n External resistor 100 001 21231300 Internal resistor 1 Ohm 10 Ohm ADC bee WARNING Changing these values voids the thermometer calibration Calibration parameters are passcode protected Figure 125 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings Calibration tab A Caution Do not change these values unless this thermometer readout has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values located on the latest Report of Calibration for this thermometer readout Chang ing these values voids the current calibration Enter the value of the external reference resistor in the External resistor box provided If no external reference resistor is being used the value in this box is ignored by the thermometer readout Enter the values for the internal reference resistors in the boxes provided The Model 1590 Super Thermometer II readout has four internal reference resis tors 1 Ohm 10 Ohm 100 Ohm and 10K Ohm The values of these reference resistors as well as the ADC constant value should be located on the Report of Calibration for this thermometer readout Select the state of the internal reference resistor oven using the Oven drop down list The oven can either be turned On or Off Typically the oven should be set On 156 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 5 6 1590 Super Thermometer II 2590 Mighty Mux II Channel Settings di alog The 1590 Super Thermometer 11 2590 Mighty Mux II Chan
226. n Channels 2567 fat 9567 RTD 1 2567 419567 E General l Channels Calibration Excitation current Resistance range 0 05 m y Auto y Cancel dio Help Figure 100 2567 RTD Module Settings dialog The Model box indicates the model number of this module The Serial box in dicates the serial number assigned to this module The Identification box indi cates the module name number of devices model number serial number and firmware version installed in this module The Channels box indicates the num ber of input channels on this module General module settings can be viewed and or modified by selecting the Gen eral tab The Channels tab displays a list of the channels on this module and al lows access to channel settings dialogs The module calibration information can be viewed and or modified by selecting the Calibration tab After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new module settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dia log closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the module settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the ther
227. n window while the log session is running Enter the filename to which the data acquired from this channel is to be written using the Acquire data to file box The default filename for each channel is Channel n txt where n is the channel number The file is saved to the Output folder or the folder specified for output files on the LogWare Options dialog The location for this file can be changed by selecting the Browse button Check the Overwrite existing check box to allow LogWare to automatically overwrite an existing file of the same name in the same folder If this box is not checked and a file of the same name exists a prompt is displayed and the op tion to overwrite the existing file or choose another filename is given If you want to write the acquired data for all enabled channels to the same out put file check the Write all acquired data to the same file option If this option is checked LogWare will use the filename and path of the first enabled channel for all channels The header of the output file will then contain information for all enabled channels and an additional column is added to the file for the chan nel number for each reading 25 User s Guide 2 3 4 26 A Note This feature should typically only be used if you are using other software to sort and analyze the logged data The output file created when using this feature can still be opened by Log Ware and displayed on screen however all
228. n any of the channel tabs displays a popup menu This menu 2 Real time logging Previous log session 2 5 2 allows channels to be added to or removed from this session and also allows the trace color to be changed or the trace can be hidden Add Channel Remove Channel Trace Color v Show Trace Figure 24 Channels popup menu LogWare is capable of opening up to 10 files channels in the same Previous Log Session window To add another channel to the window select the Add Channel option in the popup menu The Windows Open dialog is displayed The Config folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for configuration files on the LogWare Options dialog To cancel opening a file click the Cancel button Otherwise select up to 9 more files to open and click the Open button Since Log Ware only allows a total of 10 files to be opened any additional files are ignored The Add Channel option is disabled if the log session already has 10 channels open To remove a channel from the Previous Log Session window select the tab for the channel and select the Remove Channel option in the popup menu Any channel can be removed except the first channel The first channel cannot be removed When a channel is removed the corresponding tab grid and graph trace are also removed and the graph Y axis is rescaled as needed To change the color of the trace on the graph for any channel select the tab for the ch
229. n read in and displayed in the Thermometer Settings dialog This dialog is specific to the selected ther mometer readout 4 If applicable to view the settings for a specific module select the mod ule from the Modules list and click the Module Settings button 5 To view the settings for a specific channel select the channel from the Channels list and click the Channel Settings button 6 To view the coefficients for the probe on the selected channel select the Conversion Settings button 7 The conversion settings dialog for the selected conversion type is displayed 8 Click the Save As button on the conversion settings dialog to save the co efficients for the selected channel to a configuration file 9 The Windows Save As dialog is displayed Enter a filename and click the OK button to save the coefficients Please refer to Section 9 Conversion Settings Dialogs for more information 219 User s Guide 6 13 Using an IR dongle with Log Ware Some of the features of LogWare allow an IR dongle to be used to communi cate with thermometer readouts that have an IR port instead of using an RS 232 cable A Note Hart Scientific thermometer readouts with an IR port use a propri etary protocol for communication Because of this proprietary protocol LogWare is not able to use IR ports that are built into a computer Instead LogWare requires the use of an IR dongle which can be connected to a standard RS 232 port on the
230. n this module and to access the channel settings dialogs to view and or modify channel specific settings Channels Calibration Channels Channel Settings 2 963258 Figure 93 2565 PTC Module Settings Channels tab Select the channel to view and or modify from the Channels list This list indi cates the channel number with respect to this module and the serial number of the probe on each channel Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate channel settings di alog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel are read in from the thermometer readout The Channel Settings dialog is described in detail in Section 4 4 3 15 1560 Black Stack Thermocouple Channel Settings Dialog 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 10 2 Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify module calibration informa tion Channels Calibration AMP GA Calibration date OS 1 GA 1 WARNING Changing these values voids the module calibration Calibration parameters are passcode protected Figure 94 2565 PTC Module Settings Calibration tab The settings on the Calibration tab may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the Calibration tab and the Edit button is dis played The other controls on this tab are disabled To edit the calibration pa rameters click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer r
231. ne set of limit alarm lines for all sets of data traces 188 5 Menus Graph menu 5 5 1 5 Background tab The Background tab can be used to set the background colors of titles the leg end and the graph itself Titles Axis Fonts Trends Background Legend Object Style and Color gt Apply To Style Graph Title No Style C Bottom Title sn C Left Title k Text Color Drop Shad Right Title Drop Shadow C Legend Raised Background C Graph C Lowered m Graph Window Palette Background Color y jis Default y Backdrop None y Figure 146 Graph Settings Background tab Note To restore the background settings to their default settings select the Restore Default Settings option in the Graph menu Select the title legend or graph option to which the background settings are to be applied using the Apply To options The other controls on this tab change to show the current settings for the selected item Select the background style options to apply to the selected title legend or graph using the Style options Select the text and background color for the se lected item using the drop down lists provided Select the background options for the graph window using the Graph Window options Use the Background Color drop down list to select the background color for the plotting area of the graph The Backdrop option can be used to display a graphic BMP or WMF fi
232. nel Settings dia log displays information about the selected PRT Thermistor channel Scanner Channel 30 Settings 7 m Scanner Channel 30 Settings Probe selection Edit Probe Probe serial number Reference Current IW offset 0 000000 100 Ohm 1 4140 Conversion Settings Conversion settings are passcode protected Apply Conversion type Figure 126 1590 Super Thermometer 11 2590 Mighty Mux II Channel Settings dialog Some or all of the settings on this dialog may be passcode protected If so a message appears at the bottom of the Probe tab and or Calibration tab and the Edit button is displayed The protected controls are disabled To edit the pro tected settings click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the ther mometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the protected controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button Select the probe to be assigned to this channel using the Probe selection drop down list The Model 1590 Super Thermometer II readout can hold infor mation for up to 56 probes simultaneously Any one of these probes can then be assigned to any channel When a new probe is selected the current settings for that probe are read in from the thermometer readout A progress dialog is displayed whil
233. nes and statistical and trend lines 1 Introduction Features LogWare s data analysis features include e Can open both real time log files and downloaded files e Spreadsheet style grid to view all acquired readings e Graph zooming capability e User customizable graph settings including titles legend grid lines and statistical and trend lines e Printing graph and acquired readings e Can have multiple windows open simultaneously e Can superimpose up to 10 sets of data on the same graph LogWare also provides utilities that allow access to the following digital ther mometer readout features as applicable e Downloading data stored in the thermometer readout s logs and or mem ory e Viewing log status and clearing log data e Synchronizing thermometer readout s date time with computer s clock e Changing thermometer readout specific parameters filtering sampling measurement calibration constants etc e Changing probe specific parameters serial numbers conversion type and coefficients calibration dates cold junction settings etc New Features in Version 1 3 Version 1 3 has added support for Models 1594A and 1595A Super Thermom eter readouts Features supported by these new thermometer readouts include e Real Time logging e Thermometer settings e Synchronize Date Time Version 1 2 Version 1 2 has added support for Models 1523 and 1524 Handheld Thermom eter readouts Also previously logged dat
234. ng labels The Logging Labels option can be used to view and or modify the labels that the thermometer readout assigns to readings that are stored in the thermometer readout s log s This feature is only supported by the 1529 Chub E4 Ther mometer readout When selecting the Logging Labels option the Select Model dialog is dis played LogWare needs to know the model of the thermometer readout Please refer to Section 4 2 Select Model Dialog for more details on the Select Model dialog After the thermometer readout model and communication settings have been selected the Logging Labels dialog for the selected thermometer readout is dis played The Logging Labels dialog is described in more detail in Section 4 3 Logging Labels Dialogs Thermometer settings The Thermometer Settings option can be used to view and or modify many thermometer readout module and probe settings including filtering sampling measurement calibration and conversion settings All thermometer readouts supported by LogWare support this feature Please refer to Section 1 4 4 Firm ware Requirements for more information When selecting the Thermometer Settings option the Select Model dialog is displayed LogWare needs to know the model of the thermometer readout in or der to display the appropriate thermometer readout settings dialogs Please re fer to Section 4 2 Select Model Dialog for more details on the Select Model dialog After the thermometer read
235. nistrator passcode To change this setting the correct administrator passcode must be entered For more information see Section 5 6 4 4 Admin Passcode Tab The Always prompt to select printer before printing option determines whether the Print Setup dialog is displayed when printing The Print Setup dialog allows the printer to be selected as well as the paper size source and orientation set tings as supported by the selected printer driver If this option is not checked Log Ware always prints to the default printer using that printer s default settings The Always print statistics with readings option determines whether LogWare appends statistical data to the end of the readings when printing an output file Tf this option is checked the statistical data is printed 195 User s Guide 196 A Note LogWare allows the readings history to be printed with or without statistics while a real time log session is running However when printing the readings history during a real time log session be aware that the sta tistical values may not exactly match the printed readings since the statis tics may get updated after the readings have already been printed For best results only print the readings AFTER the real time log session has stopped The Always prompt to connect thermometer option determines whether LogWare displays a prompt before attempting to communicate with the ther mometer readout These prompts are intended to b
236. nnel 1 Settings Probe Calibration Probe serial number 362568 Range Wires 100 Ohm y 4 wire y Conversion type ITS 90 Conversion Settings Cancel Help Figure 61 1529 Chub E4 PRT thermistor channel settings dialog Some or all of the settings on this dialog may be passcode protected If so a message appears at the bottom of the Probe tab and or Calibration tab and the Edit button is displayed The protected controls are disabled To edit the pro tected settings click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the ther mometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the protected controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 2 6 1 clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the channel settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the
237. nnel calibration informa tion Probe Calibration Calibration date CO C100 CRAJ WARNING Changing these values voids the module calibration Calibration parameters are passcode protected Figure 66 1529 Chub E4 thermocouple channel settings Probe tab Caution Do not change these values unless this channel has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values located on the latest Report of Calibration for this channel Changing these values voids the current calibration Select the date this channel was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for this channel Select the date this channel is due for recalibration using the drop down calen dar or by entering the date Enter the values for the calibration constants in the boxes provided The cali bration constants required by a Thermocouple channel are C0 C100 and CRJ The values of these constants should be located on the Report of Calibration for this channel 1560 Black Stack settings dialog The 1560 Black Stack Settings dialog displays information about the thermom eter readout including model number serial number identification information 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs and the total number of channels It also allows many thermometer readout set tings to be viewed and or modified 1560 Black Stack Settings r 1560 Black Stack
238. nstrument If the checkbox is unchecked the resistor s calibration due date is set to zeros in the instrument 171 5 Menus File menu 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 Menus LogWare s features and tools are all accessible through menu options This sec tion describes each of LogWare s menus File menu The File menu provides options for creating a new real time configuration opening and saving real time configuration files printing and exiting LogWare New Ctrl h Open Ctro Save As Print Exit Figure 137 File menu New The New option can be used to clear the current real time log session settings and display the Log Session Settings dialog The C button on the toolbar corresponds to the New option When selecting the New option a prompt is displayed to confirm that the cur rent real time log session settings 1f any will be reset To abort resetting the current real time log session settings click the No button Otherwise click the Yes button to reset the current log session settings The Log Session Settings dialog will be displayed Please refer to Section 2 3 Log Session Settings Dia log for more information on configuring a real time log session The New option and toolbar button are disabled while a real time log session window is open Open The Open option allows a real time log session configuration file to be opened If the same basic configuration is frequently used to perform real
239. nter filename check box is checked a prompt is displayed af ter the data is downloaded for the file that needs to be created If this option is not checked the default filename is used After selecting the appropriate options on this dialog click the Download but ton to start the download process For more details on the download process please refer to Section 8 Download Process To close this dialog click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 59 User s Guide 60 3 4 3 4 1 Log status dialogs Log Ware provides a tool to view the status of the thermometer readout s mem ory or logs This tool is accessible by selecting the Log Status option in the Download menu The only thermometer readouts supported by LogWare that have this feature are the 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout and the 1560 Black Stack Thermometer readout The following section describes the dialogs for viewing the log status for each supported thermometer readout 1523 Handheld log status dialog The Model 1523 Handheld Thermometer readout can store readings in a log called the demand log LogWare can display the current status of this log and provides a way to clear all readings from the log When the Log Status option in the Download menu is selected and the 1523 Thermometer readout is se lected on the Select Model dialog the 1523 Log Status dialog is displayed 1523 Log Status Refresh
240. nu 5 5 2 5 5 3 5 5 4 5 5 5 Click the Text button to enter the labels for each set trace of data on the graph By entering text into the boxes provided the legend will automatically appear on the graph To hide the legend remove the text from all of the boxes By default all of the legend text boxes are empty causing the legend to be hidden Select the position with respect to the graph to place the legend using the Posi tion options Select the size of the legend using the Size options To change the font or style that the legend uses see the Fonts tab To set the legend colors see the Back ground tab Restore default settings The Restore Default Settings option restores the graph to its default settings and applies to the current log session window The Restore Default Settings option and toolbar button are only enabled if a real time or previous log session window is open Trace color The Trace Color option allows the trace color for the selected channel to be changed Please refer to Section 2 4 Real Time Log Session for more details on changing the trace color for real time log sessions and Section 2 5 Previous Log Session for more details on changing the trace color for previous log sessions The Trace Color option is only enabled if a real time or previous log session window is open Zoom in The Zoom In option allows the graph to be zoomed in The El button on the toolbar corresponds to the Zoom
241. o be used LogWare needs to know what data to acquire when to acquire it and when to stop To configure a real time log session 1 Select the New option in the File menu 2 This will clear any current log session settings and display the Log Ses sion Settings dialog 3 Configure the Thermometer Log Session and Channels settings accord ing to the needs of this session 4 Once configured either click the Start button on the Log Session Set tings dialog or click the Close button then select the Start option in the Datalog menu or click the button on the toolbar This will start the real time log session and the Log Session window is displayed 5 Ifa delayed start time was selected the real time log session will begin at the selected time Otherwise the log session will start immediately Please refer to Section 2 Real Time Logging for more information Starting a real time log session unattended delayed start The main purpose of LogWare is to perform real time data acquisition Many times the technician is present when a log session starts However sometimes it is necessary or desirable to start a real time log session at off hours when the technician is out By default a real time log session starts immediately when the Start button on the Log Session Settings dialog is clicked or when the Start option in the Datalog menu is selected However Log Ware has a feature called the Delayed Start which allows a rea
242. o take readings at the exact selected interval i e the 1560 thermometer readout allows a minimum interval of 2 sec onds but actually takes about 2 3 seconds to make one measurement For this reason using the minimum interval supported by the thermometer readout may cause some duplicate readings to be taken To avoid this problem see the Wait until new measurement is ready when applicable option on the LogWare Options dialog Please refer to Seciton 5 6 4 Op tions for more details If this interval is set to a value of 0 LogWare will attempt to take simultaneous readings on all enabled channels of the thermometer readout If this feature is used you should use the Interval between scan sequences setting to limit how often all channels are sampled A Note when using this feature the Wait until new measurement is ready option on the General tab of the Options dialog MUST be disabled un checked 22 2 Real time logging Log session settings dialog A Typically LogWare is used to take continuous measurements on all enabled channels However LogWare has a feature that allows one measurement to be taken on each enabled channel at a set interval For example Log Ware could be used to monitor the gradients in a liquid bath using 10 probes at various loca tions in the bath To measure gradients readings should be taken simulta neously or at least as close together as possible but maybe a set of readings only needs to be ta
243. og for thermocouple probes displays information about the selected channel Channel 1 Settings gt Channel 1 Settings Probe Misc Probe serial number Calibration date ager 230 8 721 2008 y Probe Type rc y Conversion type Apply Thermocouple Type Y Conversion Settings RJC type RJC temperature 23 000 a External Tec E Cancel Help Figure 52 1523 1524 Thermocouple Channel Settings dialog Some or all of the settings on this dialog may be passcode protected If so a message appears at the bottom of the Probe tab and the Edit button is dis played The protected controls are disabled To edit the protected settings click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the protected controls are enabled and the val ues may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is 81 User s Guide 82 4 4 1 6 1 clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the channel settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked
244. og is specific to the selected thermometer readout 4 If applicable to view the settings for a specific module select the mod ule from the Modules list and click the Module Settings button 5 To view the settings for a specific channel select the channel from the Channels list and click the Channel Settings button 6 The settings can be modified at this time Some settings may be passcode protected Passcode protected settings can be viewed but can only be modified after entering the correct passcode a Click the Edit button b The Enter Passcode dialog is displayed Enter the passcode for the con nected thermometer readout and click the OK button c If the correct passcode was entered the passcode protected settings are enabled and may be modified 7 To write the changes that have been made to the thermometer readout click the OK button on any and or all dialogs 8 To close the dialogs without writing the new settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button on any of the dialogs Note The passcode for the thermometer readout is completely independ ent of the administrator passcode in Log Ware The administrator passcode is used by LogWare to protect certain LogWare options and default set tings on the LogWare Options dialog only Thermometer passcodes are specific to the thermometer readout being used and are required to change certain settings in the thermometer readout itself Please refer to Section
245. og ses sion is running may cause the measurement process to halt temporarily until the menu is closed or the dialog that is displayed is closed Also running other applications on the computer while logging real time data especially those that require a lot of processing time or that access the disk frequently may cause the measurement process to halt temporarily while the other application is busy It is recommended that once a real time log session is started the software and the computer be left alone to log the data without interruption If the log session was configured to stop logging at a specified time or after a specific number of readings Log Ware continues to acquire data until the end log criteria is met The log session can be stopped manually at any time by se lecting the Stop option in the Datalog menu or by clicking the E button on the toolbar When a log session is stopped manually a prompt is displayed asking if the log session window should be closed The log session window may be closed at this time or left open In order to start a new log session the current log session window must be closed Select Yes to close the log session window immedi ately or select No to leave the window open To close the real time log session window select the Close option in the Datalog menu or click the AL button on the toolbar If the Show Log Ses sion Settings dialog after closing log session option on the LogWare Options dia
246. ogWare so cesta eek ee eee eS 8 1 71 LogWare main display lt i aci a adoa a a a 0000 eee eee ee eee 9 LogWare options ece 2 2 22 ttre iuts 11 2 Real time logging o eo om res ves ws WD 2 1 2 2 23 2 4 FS MEMO gas we a kak GEES Fe ee eS 13 2 1 1 NeW ue ens ARS Gh ee eee SE Eee oe a ok eae a 4 13 2 1 2 O 13 2 1 3 SAVE AS ara a a BER Oy eee a laa a rare 14 Datalos menu s ls cp aag d a a wc 15 2 2 1 SETUP ey datas a A als A ae a a A Aa ata 15 2 2 2 A asl Gd Sep haste ade seb a e a Sh dey ected OG Ses aE a de p Bcene 15 2 2 3 SOPs cee sia eS oe awe ee baw ee SSS wee ware e Ga ee werk 15 2 2 4 CLOSE sar at Ro ae a ee dea BE Qe a eo ee ee 16 2 2 5 Mute all alatms 2 ts dr Sa a dis he ace Sa 16 Log session settings dialog o o 16 2 3 1 Thermometer tabio a e i ea o a rai ia 19 2 3 2 Lop Session tabu dir rara a as AREA 22 2 3 3 Channelsitabs sg aces eo a BO RE e e ge 24 2 3 4 Delayed Start Date Time dialog o o o ooo oo 26 2 3 5 Alarm Settings dialogs vos oe oe a ti e a e eS 27 2 3 6 Statistics Settings dialog his e a Ee Ra a a eR A 30 Real time log session ode a ker eoa e e 31 2 4 1 Channels erid eas ac oi e a o ee did 33 2 4 2 Statisticsdistios g e e a a eS 35 2 4 3 Graphs e gtd waa aa ee age a ha a ae a Bats 35 2 4 4 Current Alarm Settings dialog 2 2 a 37 2 4 5 Outputtile dale e SMA ee GEE Se ode Fs 37 ij 25 2 4 6 Alamillo Boake wick
247. ogWare Options Folders tab The Default folder for configuration files option allows the default folder to which configuration files are saved to be specified LogWare allows many types of configuration files to be saved including real time log session rls alarm alm and conversion types i90 i68 cvd ply hpt w90 thr tcp tct tcx Use the Browse button to select an existing path The Default folder for output files option allows the default folder to which output files are saved to be specified Output files are the files created by a real time log session and typically have the extension txt Use the Browse button to select an existing path The Default folder for download files option allows the default folder to which download files are saved to be specified Download files are the files created when data is downloaded from the memory or log s of a thermometer readout and typically have the extension txt Use the Browse button to select an existing path 197 User s Guide 5 6 4 3 Tools tab The Tools tab displays options pertaining to the Tools menu options General Folders Tools Admin Passcode Allow editing instrument serial numbers V Read thermometer settings after applying changes m Passcode protection When not possible to use thermometer s internal settings JV Protect probe conversion settings JV Protect calibration parameters
248. ome too small to display the title label or legend in the selected font size Click the Reset button to restore the size to its default setting Trends tab The Trends tab can be used to superimpose trend lines Min Max Average etc curve fit and limit alarm lines on the graph Titles Axis Fonts Trends Background Legend r Statistical Lines m Limit Lines Al Sets Al F High po Set Number f ll Color nm fo TM v Mean Ooo i Min Max EN El I Std Dev E z 117 J Best Fit co I Curve Fit ia gt I Fill Opposite Curve Fit y ih base Type Variable Order Polynomia y Order 2 Low Label Granularity ay gt Figure 145 Graph Settings Trends tab Note To restore the trend settings to their default settings select the Re store Default Settings option in the Graph menu The Statistical Lines options allow the user to specify which statistical lines should be displayed on the graph Check the All Sets option to apply the statistical lines settings to all of the sets traces on the graph When this check box is checked the Set Number controls are disabled 5 Menus Graph menu The Set Number box allows the user to select which set trace to which to ap ply the statistical lines settings This setting can only be changed if the All Sets check box is not checked Note This software only has one set of data When acquiring real time data this set is the data being acquired When
249. on trols remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button Enter the serial number of the probe attached to this channel in the Probe serial number box The serial number can be any combination of numbers and or let ters up to 8 characters in length The dash character can also be used in se rial numbers Select the conversion type to use for the probe on this channel Available con version types will vary depending on the module that this channel belongs to Refer to the Report of Calibration for the probe attached to this channel for in formation on the conversion type that the probe was calibrated for If the selected conversion type requires coefficients or other settings the Con version Settings button is enabled Click the Conversion Settings button to dis play the dialog for the selected conversion type Otherwise the Conversion 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 15 Settings button is disabled Please refer to Section 9 Conversion Settings Dialogs for a detailed description of the Conversion Settings dialogs Note The conversion settings are not written to the thermometer readout until the Apply or OK button is clicked on this dialog 1560 Black Stack Thermocouple Channel Settings dialog The 1560 Black Stack Thermocouple Channel Settings dialog displays infor mation about the selected channel Channel 23 Settings 3 m Channel 23 Se
250. on each channel e After specified time elapses Log session stops automatically after the specified time has elapsed 5 Specify the End Log criteria e Ifthe After specified number of readings option was selected enter the number of readings to be acquired on each channel in the After box e Ifthe After specified time elapses option was selected enter the amount of time to elapse in the After box 6 Click the Start button on the Log Session Settings dialog to start the log session 7 When the selected end log criteria are met logging will stop automatically Please refer to Section 2 Real Time Logging for more information Opening a configuration file automatically on start up LogWare is designed to be flexible in the thermometer readouts that it can use and the features it supports However most users of LogWare will probably al ways use the same thermometer readout scale and communication settings to do all or most of their data acquisition For this reason Log Ware allows the real time log session settings to be saved to a configuration file Opening the configuration file restores the settings therefore eliminating the need to manually configure Log Ware every time a new log session is started 207 User s Guide Configuration files save the following information about a real time log session e Thermometer readout model serial number session temperature scale and resolution settings e Communicat
251. on settings are still active in Log Ware after a log session is closed To access the Log Session Settings di alog select the Setup option in the Datalog menu If this option is not checked this dialog is not displayed when the log session window is closed The Prompt to synchronize real time log session option determines whether or not a prompt is displayed when the real time log session is initialized and ready to start acquiring data This prompt can be used to facilitate synchronizing Log Ware with another process or application If this option is not checked LogWare begins acquiring data immediately after initialization of the session is complete Note When using the delayed start feature of Log Ware to start a log ses sion unattended make sure this setting is not checked Otherwise the log session may not start as expected The Wait until new measurement is ready when applicable option determines whether Log Ware should always wait until the thermometer readout indicates a new measurement is ready on the current channel before querying the measure ment during a real time log session If this option is not checked LogWare al ways queries the last measurement taken on the current channel Not all thermometers supported by Log Ware support waiting until a new mea surement is ready For these thermometer readouts LogWare always queries the last measurement taken on the current channel Note This option is protected by the admi
252. on the graph by checking the Show gridlines on graphs option of the General tab of the LogWare Options dialog Please refer to Section 5 6 4 1 General Tab for more details Right clicking on the graph displays a popup menu This menu is identical to the Graph menu and consists of options for working with the graph during a real time log session Some of the menu options apply only to the currently se lected channel Graph Settings Restore Default Settings Trace Color Zoom In Restore Print Graph Figure 18 Graph popup menu There are many customizable settings for the graph such as titles a legend background and text colors grid lines and trend lines All of these features can be accessed by selecting the Graph Settings option in the popup menu or in the Graph menu The default graph settings can be restored by selecting the Re store Default Settings option in the popup menu or in the Graph menu For more details on customizing the graph settings please refer to Section 5 5 1 Graph Settings Dialog 2 Real time logging Real time log session 2 4 4 2 4 5 2 4 6 The Zoom In and Restore options are not applicable to a real time log session and are disabled The graph may be printed at any time by selecting the Print Graph option in the popup menu or in the Graph menu or by selecting the Print Graph option in the File menu Current Alarm Settings dialog The Current Alarm Settings dialog display
253. on to display the dialog for the se lected conversion type Please refer to Section 9 Conversion Settings Dialogs for a detailed description of the Conversion Settings dialogs Note The conversion settings are not written to the thermometer readout until the Apply or OK button is clicked on this dialog 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings dialog The 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings dialog displays information about the thermometer readout including model number identification information and 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs the total number of channels It also allows many thermometer readout settings to be viewed and or modified 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings i 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings Model Identification Channels fi 590 f 590 2 03N 22 Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Calibration Filter type Exponential F Response time Threshhold 20 0 0 1 000 Cancel Help Figure 120 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings dialog The 1590 Super Thermometer II readout must be connected to an available COM port and the communication settings must be properly configured so that this information can be read in from the thermometer readout If communica tion with the thermometer readout is not successful an error message is dis played and this dialog is blank A progress dialog is displayed while the current thermometer readout settings are b
254. on was selected a prompt appears for every channel By default the filenames are downloadn txt where n 1s the channel number Accept the default filename s or enter new filename s and click the Save but ton to continue If a file with the selected filename already exists confirm over writing the existing file or enter a new filename Clicking the Cancel button on the Windows Save As dialog aborts the download process If the Prompt to enter filename s option was not selected the data is saved to file s with the default filename s 233 User s Guide 234 8 2 Once all of the downloaded data has been saved into the specified file s the names of all of the files are displayed on the Downloaded Files dialog Downloaded files 3 The downloaded data was written to the following file s To view the contents of a file double click the appropriate entry in the list below C Program Files Hart Scientific 9935 LogWare I Download download1 txt C Program Files Hart Scientific 9935 LogWare I Download download2 txt C Program Files Hart Scientific 9935 LogWare I Download download3 txt C Program Files Hart Scientific 9935 LogWare II Download download4 txt Send file s directly to default printer when double clicked Figure 169 Downloaded Files dialog To open a file that downloaded data was written to double click the appropriate entry in the list The file will be opened in the File Viewer window Fo
255. only to protect LogWare settings and is independent of instrument passcodes Figure 153 LogWare Options Admin Passcode tab The Edit Protected Options button allows the user to change the settings of the passcode protected options This button is disabled if an administrator passcode 199 User s Guide 200 has not been setup or if the correct passcode has been entered since the LogWare Options dialog was displayed Clicking the Edit Protected Options button displays the Enter Passcode dialog The current administrator passcode must be entered to enable changing the pro tected options Enter Passcode p Enter Passcode Passcode Cancel Figure 154 Enter Passcode dialog Enter the current administrator passcode and click the OK button to continue If the passcode entered does not match the current administrator passcode a mes sage is displayed and access is denied Otherwise if the correct passcode is en tered the Edit Protected Options button becomes disabled and all passcode protected options on the LogWare Options dialog become enabled These op tions remain enabled until the LogWare Options dialog is closed or until the user attempts to change the administrator passcode 5 Menus Tools menu The Change Admin Passcode button allows the administrator passcode to be setup or changed Change Passcode i j m Change Passcode Logw are has some options that can be passcode protected to pre
256. ons The integration time can be set to any value between 2 and 9 999 seconds A Note The integration time must be greater than or equal to the conver sion time If the integration time is set to a value that is less than the cur rent conversion time the conversion time setting is automatically set to match the integration time setting Enter the conversion time value in the Conversion time box provided or use the up down buttons The conversion time can be set to any value between 2 and 10 seconds The Resolutions controls allow the thermometer readout s resolution settings to be viewed and or modified The resolution settings include the Temperature Resistance and Ratio settings Enter the resolution for temperature readings in the Temperature box provided or use the up down buttons The temperature resolution can be set to any value between 0 and 8 digits places after decimal point Enter the resolution for resistance readings in the Resistance box provided or use the up down buttons The resistance resolution can be set to any value be tween 0 and 8 digits places after decimal point Enter the resolution for ratio readings in the Ratio box provided or use the up down buttons The ratio resolution can be set to any value between 0 and 8 digits places after decimal point 141 User s Guide 4 4 4 3 Measurement tab Select the Measurement tab to view and or modify measurement settings Filtering Sampling Measuremen
257. ontrols for the passcode protected settings are disabled To edit the protected settings click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is en tered the controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls re main enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the thermometer readout settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new settings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 4 1 Filtering tab Select the Filtering tab to view and or modify the filter settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Calibration Filter type Aver
258. option and toolbar button are disabled while a real time log session is running Logging labels The Logging Labels option provides a utility to view and or modify logging labels The AB button on the toolbar corresponds to the Logging Labels option Please refer to Section 4 3 Logging Labels Dialogs for a description of this feature The Logging Labels option and toolbar button are disabled while a real time log session is running 5 Menus Tools menu 5 6 3 5 6 4 Thermometer settings The Thermometer Settings option provides a utility to access the thermometer readout settings dialogs The ES button on the toolbar corresponds to the Thermometer Settings op tion Please refer to Section 4 4 Thermometer Settings Dialogs for a descrip tion of these dialogs The Thermometer Settings option and toolbar button are disabled while a real time log session is running Options The Options option displays the LogWare Options dialog to view and or mod ify LogWare s default settings LogWare Options Logw are Options Disabled options may be passcode protected General Eolders Tools Admin Passcode V Show Log Session Settings dialog on start up IV Load default configuration file automatically Default configuration file C Program Files FlukeH art Scientific Logw are II 2 V Show Log Session Settings dialog after closing log session I Prompt to synchronize real time log session FF Wait unt
259. or Off Typically the oven should be set On 145 User s Guide 146 4 4 4 6 1575A Super Thermometer 2575 Mighty Mux Channel Settings The 1575A Super Thermomete 2575 Mighty Mux Channel Settings dialog displays information about the selected PRT Thermistor channel Scanner Channel 3 Settings m Scanner Channel 3 Settings Probe selection Edit Probe Reference Current 3W offset I 00 Ohm Y fi 4140 Conversion type OK fit 5 90 y Conversion Settings Cancel Conversion settings are passcode protected Help Figure 118 1575A Super Thermometer 2575 Mighty Mux Channel Settings dialog Some or all of the settings on this dialog may be passcode protected If so a message appears at the bottom of the Probe tab and or Calibration tab and the Edit button is displayed The protected controls are disabled To edit the pro tected settings click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the ther mometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the protected controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button Select the probe to be assigned to this channel using the Probe selection drop down list The Model 1575A Super Thermometer readout can hold infor mation for up to 16 probes simultaneously Any one of these probes can then be assigned to any
260. or information on the conver sion type that the probe was calibrated for If the selected conversion type requires coefficients or other settings the Con version Settings button is enabled Click the Conversion Settings button to dis play the dialog for the selected conversion type Otherwise the Conversion Settings button is disabled Please refer to Section 9 Conversion Settings Dialogs for a detailed description of the Conversion Settings dialogs Note The conversion settings are not written to the thermometer readout until the Apply or OK button is clicked on this dialog 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 2 6 2 Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify channel calibration informa tion Probe Calibration Calibration date Du CO C100 C400 a 0000 a WARNING Changing these values voids the module calibration Calibration parameters are passcode protected Figure 63 1529 Chub E4 PRT thermistor channel settings Calibration tab Caution Do not change these values unless this channel has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values located on the latest Report of Calibration for this channel Changing these values voids the current calibration Select the date this channel was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for this channel Select the date th
261. ort of Calibration The box must contain a valid value A Note Not all thermometer readouts that support the PT100 conversion type allow the RO coefficient to be entered This option is only available if the selected thermometer readout supports it Click the Open button to display the Windows Open dialog to open a previ ously saved configuration file which contains a PT100 coefficient Click the Save As button to display the Windows Save As dialog to save the current PT100 coefficient to a configuration file Click the OK button to accept the current coefficients and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 9 Conversion settings dialogs High Temperature PRT Settings dialog 9 5 High Temperature PRT Settings dialog The High Temperature PRT Settings dialog allows the RTPW A and B coeffi cients to be entered High Temperature PRT Settings gt High Temperature PRT Settings 4 Open RT PW fi 00 001213132 Save As A 0 0001 21213 B 0 000051 32454 Cancel Help Figure 176 High Temp PRT Settings dialog If the High Temperature PRT coefficients were read in from the thermometer readout the boxes are filled with the current coefficient values Enter the RTPW coefficient from the Report of Calibration in the RTPW box This box must contain a valid
262. ottom of the Probe tab and the Edit button is dis played The protected controls are disabled To edit the protected settings click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the protected controls are enabled and the val ues may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the channel settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the channel settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 1 5 1 Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Probe tab Select the Probe tab to view and or modify probe settings Probe Misc Probe serial number Calibration dat
263. out Select the time interval between subsequent scans through a scan sequence us ing the Scan sequence delay controls The scan sequence delay can be set to any value from 0 to 10 000 seconds 0 to 166 minutes or 0 to 2 hours Note Setting the scan sequence delay to an interval of less than the set ting of the sample interval multiplied by the number of channels in the scan sequence effectively disables the scan sequence delay feature 99 User s Guide 4 4 3 3 Measurement tab Select the Measurement tab to view and or modify measurement related set tings Filtering Sampling Measurement Modules Scan mode Scan channels Scan channels only y M1 SPRT 1 M 2 SPRT 2 Primary channel 3 HPRT 1 F y vV 4 HPRT 2 Ube 15 PRTS 1 zi Enable All Disable All Figure 70 1560 Black Stack settings Measurement tab Select the scan mode for the 1560 Black Stack Thermometer readout using the Scan mode drop down list The scan mode can be set to one of the following options e Primary channel only e Alternate scan primary channels e Scan channels only If the Primary channel only option is selected the thermometer readout will be set to measure only the channel selected in the Primary channel drop down list below If the Alternate scan primary channels option is selected the thermometer read out will be set to alternate measurements on the primary channel and each of the enabled scan c
264. out only if this readout received an accredited calibration 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 1 4 Misc tab Select the Misc tab to view and or modify other miscellaneous thermometer readout settings Sampling Channels Calibration Mise TF Enable automatic power off TT Disable serial communication Figure 48 1523 1524 Settings Misc tab The Enable automatic power off setting determines whether the thermometer readout will automatically shut itself off after a specific amount of time By checking this option the time period is set to 30 minutes The Disable serial communication setting determines whether the serial port of the thermometer readout is enabled Disabling the serial port increases battery life If the serial port is disabled it can only be re enabled using the thermome ter readout s SETUP menu Zr User s Guide 78 4 4 1 5 1523 1524 PRT thermistor channel settings dialog The 1523 1524 PRT Thermistor Channel Settings dialog displays information about the selected channel Channel 2 Settings i m Channel 2 Settings Probe Misc Probe serial number Calibration date Edit agar 5482 8 72172008 y Probe Type PRT y Conversion type Apply trs 30 aad Conversion Settings Figure 49 1523 1524 PRT Thermistor Channel Settings dialog Some or all of the settings on this dialog may be passcode protected If so a message appears at the b
265. out model and communication settings have been selected the appropriate Thermometer Settings dialog for the selected ther mometer readout is displayed The Thermometer Settings dialogs are described in more detail in Section 4 4 Thermometer Settings Dialogs Warning When using the Thermometer Settings tool make sure that the thermometer readout is not currently in any menu Using the thermometer readout s menus while using the Thermometer Settings tool may cause the thermometer readout to fail to accept new settings 4 Tools Select Model dialog 4 2 Select Model dialog When any of the Tools menu options is selected the Select Model dialog is dis played LogWare needs to know the model of the thermometer readout to inter face with Select Model r Select Model Model 1560 bd Test Communication Communication settings COM port Baud rate com 38400 y Cancel fe Use lA dongle Help Figure 40 Select Model dialog If this dialog has been used previously to select a thermometer readout model and communication settings the previous settings are restored Use the Model drop down list to select the type of thermometer readout being used All other controls on this dialog are disabled until a model is selected The list of available thermometer readouts depends on the Tools menu option selected Only thermometer readouts that support the selected feature are listed Select the
266. parameters are passcode protected Figure 97 2566 TCS Module Settings Calibration tab The settings on the Calibration tab may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the Calibration tab and the Edit button is dis played The other controls on this tab are disabled To edit the calibration pa rameters click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the calibration parame ter controls are enabled and the values may be changed The controls remain enabled until this dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button Caution Do not change these values unless this module has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values located on the latest Report of Calibration for this module Changing these values voids the current calibration The AMP GA constant should always be set to and cannot be changed 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 11 2 1 Select the date this module was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module The calibration constants for this module are divided onto two tabs Inputs 1 to 6 and Inputs 7 to 12 Inputs 1 to 6 tab Select the Inputs 1 to 6 tab to view and or modify the calibration constants for inputs channels to 6 front row of this module
267. pe Otherwise the Conversion Settings button is disabled A Note The conversion settings are not written to the thermometer readout until the Apply or OK button is clicked on this dialog 4 4 1 5 2 Misc tab Select the Misc tab to view and or modify other probe settings Probe Misc Resolution 3 Y MINOP 0 MAXOP Exclusively lock probe to channel Figure 51 1523 1524 PRT Thermistor Channel Settings Misc tab Select the resolution for the readings for this probe using the Resolution drop down list The resolution can be set to any value between 0 and 3 or Auto 80 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 1 6 Enter the minimum operating temperature for this probe in the MINOP box If the temperature measured by the thermometer readout is less than this setting the display indicates an overload condition OL Enter the maximum operating temperature for this probe in the MAXOP box If the temperature measured by the thermometer readout is greater than this set ting the display indicates an overload condition OL To exclusively lock the connected probe to this channel check the Exclusively lock probe to channel checkbox Locking a probe to a channel prevents any other probe from being used on this channel and also prevents this probe from being used on any other channel including channels of other thermometer readouts 1523 1524 thermocouple channel settings dialog The Channel Settings dial
268. pecialist or Customer Service representative Enter unlock code Cancel 123456 993511 ABCDEF tio Help Figure 165 Unlock Code dialog 2 Enter the serial number provided in the Enter unlock code boxes at the bottom of the dialog The serial number must have the format XXXXXX 9935XX XXXXXX 3 Click the OK button to accept the unlock code If the serial number en tered is a valid serial number a message is displayed indicating Log Ware has been unlocked LogWare MUST be closed and restarted at this point 4 If the serial number entered is invalid Log Ware will NOT be unlocked Click the Cancel button to close this dialog without unlocking the demo verison Setting up Log Ware to read multiple scales Log Ware was designed primarily to acquire temperature readings from digital thermometer readouts However LogWare is capable of acquiring temperature resistance and voltage readings simultaneously This can be accomplished by configuring each channel on the thermometer readout to read in the desired units prior to starting a real time log session 223 User s Guide 224 To configure a thermometer readout to read different units on each channel 1 Select the Setup option in the Datalog menu to display the Log Session Settings dialog 2 Select the Thermometer tab Select the thermometer readout model using the Model drop down list 4 Select the COM port and baud rate using the drop
269. pen Previously Logged Data File 1 Channel 16 txt 2 Channel 13 txt 3 Channel 14 txt 4 Channel 15 txt 5 Channel 4 txt 6 Channel 2 txt 7 Channel 3 txt 8 Channel 1 txt Figure 140 View Menu Toolbar The Toolbar option toggles the display of the toolbar at the top of the main window A check mark appears next to this option if the toolbars are currently displayed Status bar The Status bar option toggles the display of the status bar at the bottom of the main window A check mark appears next to this option if the status bar is cur rently displayed Alarm settings The Alarm Settings option displays the current alarm settings for the selected channel This option only applies to channels in a real time log session If no alarms were configured for the selected channel this option is disabled 5 Menus View menu 5 4 4 5 4 5 5 4 6 5 4 7 5 4 8 Show trace The Show Trace option toggles displaying the trace on the graph for the se lected channel This option applies to both real time and previous log session windows A check mark appears next to this option if the trace for the selected channel is currently displayed This option is only enabled when a real time or previous log session window is displayed Alarm log The Alarm Log option displays the alarm log for the current real time log ses sion Please refer to Section 7 2 3 Alarm Log File for more details on alarm log files This o
270. ply button Caution Do not change these values unless this module has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values located on the latest Report of Calibration for this module Changing these values voids the current calibration Select the date this module was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module Enter the values for the calibration constants in the boxes provided The cali bration constants required by the 2563 module are 0 ADJ 10K ADJ and 100K ADJ The values of these constants should be located on the Report of Calibra tion for this module 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 3 9 2564 THRS Module Settings dialog The 2564 Module Settings dialog displays information about the 2564 module including model number serial number identification information and the number of channels on this module It also allows many module specific set tings to be viewed and or modified 2564 Module Settings E 2564 Module Settings Model Serial Identification Channels 2564 fa 9564 THAS A 206441956 E General l Channels Calibration Excitation current Resistance range 2 pA Auto Apply Front row wires Rear row wires 4 wire 4 wire Figure 88 2564 THRS Module Settings dialog The Model box indicates the model number of this module The Serial box in
271. ption is only enabled while a real time log session window is open Readings history The Readings History option displays the output file for the selected channel of a real time log session Please refer to Section 7 2 1 Output File for more de tails on output files This option is only enabled while a real time log session window is open Open previously logged data file The Open Previously Logged Data File option allows file s containing logged or downloaded data to be opened Please refer to Section 2 5 Previous Log Session for more information on opening previous log session files When selecting the Open Previously Logged Data File option the Windows Open dialog is displayed The Config folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for configuration files on the LogWare Options dia log Both output files and download files can be opened in the Previous Log Session window These files should have a txt extension To cancel opening a file click the Cancel button Otherwise select up to 10 files to open and click the Open button If more than 10 files are selected only the first 10 files are opened and the rest are ignored For more details about output files please re fer to Section 7 2 1 Output File For more details about download files please refer to Section 7 2 2 Download File MRU list The View menu MRU list indicates up to the last 8 output or download files that were opened in a Prev
272. r Thermometer Probe Settings dialog The 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer probe settings dialog displays probe information pertaining to the current channel selection Channel 1 Probe Settings m Channel 1 Probe Settings Probe Type Calibration Date Nominal Current Maximum Current Maximum Temperature 420 D C Apply Conversion Type JITS 90 A DK Conversion Settings Cancel Probe settings are passcode protected Help Figure 134 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Probe settings dialog The settings on the Probe Settings dialog may be passcode protected If so a message appears at the bottom of the dialog and the Edit button is displayed The controls on this dialog are disabled when the settings are protected To edit the probe settings click the Edit button and enter the current passcode for the thermometer readout If the correct passcode is entered the controls are en abled and the values may be changed Select the probe to be assigned to this channel using the Probe selection drop down list The Model 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer readout can hold information for up to 100 probes Any one of these probes can then be assigned to any channel When a new probe is selected the current settings for that probe are read in from the thermometer readout A progress dialog is displayed while the probe settings are being read in After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or
273. r more details on the File Viewer window please refer to Section 2 4 8 File Viewer Window To print a file check the Send file s directly to default printer when dou ble clicked option Double clicking an entry in the list will then cause the file to be sent to the current default printer Click the OK button to close this dialog 1560 Black Stack download process The download process for the 1560 Black Stack Thermometer readout consists of 3 main steps 1 Download the data from the thermometer readout 2 Parse the data 3 Write the data to download file s When the download process starts a progress dialog appears to indicate the download progress To abort downloading the data from the thermometer read out click the Cancel button on the progress dialog Note When downloading data from the 1560 the measurement process in the thermometer readout is halted until downloading is complete 8 Download process 1575A Super Thermometer download process 8 3 If the Prompt to enter filename s option was selected the Windows Save As dialog is displayed to get the name of the file s that the data should be saved to once the data has been downloaded The Download folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for download files on the LogWare Options dialog e If the Write all readings into a single file option was selected all readings will be written to the specified file By default the filenam
274. r of readings to be downloaded to be specified Selecting the Download all readings from log option indicates that all of the readings in the selected log should be downloaded Selecting the Download last n readings from log option allows a specific num ber of readings to be downloaded from the selected log If this option is se lected enter the number of readings to download in the readings box This value can be set between and 100 3 Downloading logged data Download options dialogs A Note It is not possible for LogWare to determine exactly how many read ings are currently stored in the memory log Therefore memory locations that do not have a value stored in them always return a value of 0 C Enter the resolution to use to format the readings when they are written to the download file in the Resolution box This value can be set between 0 and 8 dig its places after decimal point 1590 Super Thermometer II Download Options p 1590 Super Thermometer II Download Options m Select log to download History log Memory log m Readings Download all readings from log Download last n readings from log 100 readings Resolution uy a Download Files Close J Prompt to enter filename dy Figure 34 1590 Super Thermometer II Download Options dialog Select the options regarding the file to create in the Files section If the Prompt to e
275. r row wires 109 116 131 reference 76 reference junction compensation 83 95 reference resistor 147 158 repetitions 142 154 requirements 4 reset 23 29 38 40 71 72 186 resistance 20 141 153 223 resistance range 91 103 109 113 116 128 131 resolution 20 51 53 54 56 58 59 80 84 87 141 152 response time 139 151 S sample action 140 151 sample interval 16 87 99 140 152 scale 19 31 33 37 38 183 scan mode 88 100 scan sequence 100 serial number 19 72 79 82 85 91 95 97 101 105 108 112 115 119 122 127 130 134 136 147 158 198 222 223 serial port 77 Index session temperature scale 19 31 225 size 191 sliding window 30 40 86 98 start 15 18 23 176 205 statistical lines 186 statistics 25 30 31 35 39 41 43 195 status bar 11 178 stop 15 32 176 supported thermometers 1 synchronize 27 32 65 192 214 system units 20 31 224 T temperature 74 141 152 223 253 thermocouple 254 thermocouple type 253 254 thermometer 1 7 16 19 32 48 67 thermometer passcodes 201 210 216 threshold 139 151 time format 88 title 186 189 toolbar 10 178 tools 3 65 198 trace color 26 33 35 38 42 43 191 troubleshooting 257 259 U units 74 87 99 140 151 utilities 1 3 65 V version 203 voltage 20 223 W wires 91 116 131 Z zoom mode 45 269
276. r selections above If this option is not checked the default filenames are used After selecting the appropriate options on this dialog click the Download but ton to start the download process For more details on the download process please refer to Section 8 Download Process To close this dialog click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 1524 Handheld download options dialog The Model 1524 Handheld Thermometer readout can store readings in any of two logs demand log and auto log LogWare can download the readings from these logs and write the readings into download files For more information on download files please refer to Section 7 2 2 Download File When the Down load Logged Data option in the Download menu is selected and the 1524 51 User s Guide Thermometer readout is selected on the Select Model dialog the 1524 Down load Options dialog is displayed 1524 Download Options 1524 Download Options m Select log to download Demand log C Auto log Readings Download all readings from log Download only readings with this label DATA_01 y Resolution 3 zi digits Files Write all readings into a single file e Separate readings by channel Close Prompt to enter filename s da Figure 30 1524 Download Options dialog The Select log to download section allows the lo
277. r until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button Caution Do not change these values unless this module has been recalibrated or unless these values do not match the values located on the latest Report of Calibration for this module Changing these values voids the current calibration Select the date this module was last calibrated using the drop down calendar or by entering the date This date should be located on the Report of Calibration for this module Enter the values for the calibration constants in the boxes provided The cali bration constants required by the 2568 module are 0 ADJ 1K ADJ and 4K ADJ The values of these constants should be located on the Report of Calibra tion for this module 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings dialog The 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings dialog displays infor mation about the selected channel Channel 38 Settings i Channel 38 Settings Probe Probe serial number Apply Edit 5 9 gt Conversion Settings Conversion settings are passcode protected Cancel Help Figure 108 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings dialog After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings
278. ration file to open and click the Open button For more details about the real time log session con figuration file refer to Section 7 1 1 Log Session Configuration File Real time log session configuration files can also be opened by clicking the Open button on the Log Session Settings dialog LogWare then reads the log session settings from the configuration file and ver ifies that the configuration of the currently connected thermometer readout is compatible with the log session settings If there are any conflicts or if LogWare is unable to communicate with the thermometer readout appropriate messages are displayed Once the configuration file has been read in the Log Session Settings dialog is displayed If LogWare was unable to communicate with the thermometer read out or any other error occurred the log session settings may be incomplete Save as The Save As option allows the current real time log session settings to be saved to a configuration file If the same basic configuration is frequently used to per form real time logging saving the log session settings to a configuration file can greatly reduce the time it takes to configure and start a real time log ses sion Before attempting to save a real time log session configuration use the Log Session Settings dialog to configure the log session The a button on the toolbar corresponds to the Save As menu option When selecting the Save As option the Windows Save As di
279. re read in from the thermometer readout The label used for the demand log is displayed in the 1524 Demand Log Label section The labels used for the auto log are displayed in the 1524 Auto Log Labels section The 1524 Handheld Thermometer readout has a single logging label for the de mand log The Label name box indicates the current name for this label Enter the new name for the demand log label The Labels list in the 1524 Auto Log Labels section indicates the current names of all auto log labels The 1524 Handheld Thermometer readout has 25 logging labels for the auto log To modify any of one of the labels click on the appropriate label in the Labels list The Label name box indicates the name of the label that is currently se lected Enter the new name for the selected label and press the Enter key or click the Apply gt button The Labels list is updated to reflect the change If 4 Tools Logging labels dialogs 4 3 3 the Enter key was pressed the next label in the list will automatically be se lected and the name of the next label can be entered in the Label name box Repeat this process for all labels that need to be modified To reset all labels to their default names click the Reset All button The Labels list is updated to show the default names for all labels The 1524 Handheld Thermometer readout has a single logging label for the de mand log The Demand Log Label box indicates the current name for this label
280. readout is successful click the OK button to accept the set tings and continue Click the Cancel button close this dialog and abort using the selected feature Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 49 User s Guide 50 3 3 3 3 1 Download options dialogs Log Ware provides a tool to download data from the thermometer readout s memory or logs This tool is accessible by selecting the Download Logged Data option in the Download menu The following sections describe the dialogs for each of the thermometer readouts that support this feature 1523 Handheld download options dialog The Model 1523 Handheld Thermometer readout can store readings in a log called the demand log LogWare can download the readings from this log and write the readings into download files For more information on download files please refer to Section 7 2 2 Download File on page 231 When the Download Logged Data option in the Download menu is selected and the 1523 Thermometer readout is selected on the Select Model dialog the 1523 Down load Options dialog is displayed 1523 Download Options 1 1523 Download Options Select log to download Demand log m Readings C Download all readings from log Download only reading for this index 1 y Resolution st digits Files Write all readings into a single file Separate readings by index Sire Prompt to
281. rent log ging labels The 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer readout has 25 logging labels 71 User s Guide 72 4 4 4 4 1 To modify any of one of the labels click on the appropriate label in the Labels list The Label name box indicates the name of the label that is currently se lected Enter the new name for the selected label and press the Enter key or click the Apply gt button The Labels list is updated to reflect the change If the Enter key was pressed the next label in the list will automatically be se lected and the name of the next label can be entered in the Label name box Repeat this process for all labels that need to be modified To reset all labels to their default names click the Reset All button The Labels list is updated to show the default names for all labels After all labels have been modified as needed click the OK button to write the new label names to the thermometer readout A progress dialog is displayed while the new label names are being written to the thermometer readout If no labels were modified or to close this dialog without writing the new label names to the thermometer readout click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog Thermometer settings dialogs LogWare provides tools to view and or modify various thermometer readout settings including filtering sampling measurement calibration module chan nel and probe settings Thes
282. ription of the Conversion Settings dialogs Note The conversion settings are not written to the thermometer readout until the Apply or OK button is clicked on this dialog 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Settings dialog The 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Settings dialog displays informa tion about the thermometer readout including model number identification in 159 User s Guide 160 formation and the total number of channels It also allows many thermometer readout settings to be viewed and modified 1594A Super Thermometer Settings 15944 Super Thermometer Settings Model Serial number Identification Channels fi 5944 o FLUKE 15944 0 1 004 3 1 01 fa Filtering Display Timing Scanning Channel Setup Digital Filter Enable On v Average Count 2 a Filter settings are passcode protected Cancel Figure 128 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer settings The 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer readout must be connected to an available COM port and the communication settings must be properly config ured so that this information can be read in from the thermometer readout If communication with the thermometer readout is not successful an error mes sage is displayed and this dialog is blank A progress dialog is displayed while the current thermometer readout settings are being read in The Model box indicates the model number of the thermometer readout The Ser
283. rmome ter readout is displayed The Download Options dialogs are described in more detail in Section 3 3 Download Options Dialogs This option is disabled while a real time log session is running Log status The Log Status option can be used to view the current status of the thermome ter readout s logs or memory This feature is only supported by some of the thermometer readouts supported by LogWare When selecting the Log Status option the Select Model dialog is displayed LogWare needs to know the model of the thermometer readout in order to dis play appropriate status dialog Please refer to Section 3 2 Select Model Dialog for more details on the Select Model dialog After the thermometer readout model and communication settings have been selected the appropriate Download Options dialog for the selected thermome ter readout is displayed The Log Status dialogs are described in more detail in Section 3 4 Log Status Dialogs This option is disabled while a real time log session is running 177 User s Guide 178 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 3 View menu The View menu provides options for showing or hiding the toolbar and status bar viewing current alarm settings showing or hiding graph traces viewing output and alarm log files and for opening download files or output files from previous log sessions v Toolbar v Status Bar Alarm Settings v Show Trace Alarm Log Readings History O
284. rsion setting for each channel and the session temperature scale as set on the Log Session Settings dialog LogWare attempts to create the output file for each enabled channel If LogWare is unable to create an output file or if there is an existing file of the same name and the overwrite option was not selected a prompt is displayed and a new path and or filename may be entered for the output file 31 User s Guide 32 If a delayed start time was selected a dialog appears indicating the time that the log session will begin Otherwise a dialog appears indicating that the log ses sion will begin momentarily while LogWare initializes the thermometer readout and finishes preparing to start the log session Note If a delayed start time was selected and the Prompt to synchronize real time log session option is selected on the Log Ware Options dialog a prompt is displayed asking if the synchronize feature should be disabled If the synchronize feature is not disabled the log session will not start as ex pected For more details please refer to Section 5 6 4 Options Once logging starts one measurement is taken on each enabled channel at the interval specified on the Log Session Settings dialog If the Interval between scan sequences feature was enabled Log Ware then waits the specified time and repeats this process Otherwise this process is repeated without delay Note Be aware that selecting any menu option while a real time l
285. ry log can hold decreases by approximately 16 Selecting the Download all readings from history log option indicates that the entire history log should be downloaded Selecting the Download last n readings from history log option allows a spe cific number of readings to be downloaded from the history log If this option is selected enter the number of readings to download in the readings box This value can be set between and the total number of readings in the history log Enter the resolution to use to format the readings when they are written to the download file in the Resolution box This value can be set between 0 and 12 digits places after decimal point Select the method to use when writing the downloaded readings to a file using the options in the Files section Selecting the Write all readings into a single file option causes all of the down loaded readings to be written to one file Selecting the Separate readings by channel option causes all of the downloaded readings to be separated according to the channel that each reading was taken from and written into separate files If the Prompt to enter filename s check box is checked a prompt is displayed after the data is downloaded for each file that needs to be created depending on the other selections above If this option is not checked the default filenames are used Note When downloading data from the 1560 the measurement process in the thermometer readout is hal
286. s 1590 Super Thermometer II download process Once all of the downloaded data has been saved into the specified file the file name is displayed on the Downloaded Files dialog see Figure 169 on page 233 To open the file that downloaded data was written to double click the entry in the list The file will be opened in the File Viewer window For more details on the File Viewer window please refer to Section 2 4 8 File Viewer Window To print a file check the Send file s directly to default printer when dou ble clicked option Double clicking an entry in the list will then cause the file to be sent to the current default printer Click the OK button to close this dialog 237 9 Conversion settings dialogs ITS 90 Settings dialog 9 9 1 Conversion settings dialogs The following sections describe in detail the conversion settings dialogs sup ported by LogWare Each of these dialogs may appear slightly different de pending on the features and settings supported by the thermometer readout being used A Note Some conversion type settings do not have an associated dialog i e Ohms Volts Ratio W etc ITS 90 Settings dialog The ITS 90 Settings dialog allows the RTPW Low Range and High Range co efficients to be entered ITS 90 Settings i m IT5 90 Settings Open RTP w 100 25632123 ae Low Range High Range Select low range to use Range 4 83K to 273K z A 4
287. s dialog is closed or until the current changes are applied by clicking the Apply button After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the thermometer readout settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new settings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Filtering tab Select the Filtering tab to view and or modify the filter settings Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Calibration Filter type Exponential i Response time Threshhold 10 5 0 1550 Figure 121 1590 Super Thermometer II Settings Filtering tab 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 5 2 Use the Filter type drop down list to select the type of filtering to use The filter type can be set to one of the following options e None e Average e Exponential Tf th
288. s its configuration files The Log Ware Software requires one of the following operating systems e Windows 95 98 ME e Windows NT with Service Pack 4 or later installed e Windows 2000 e Windows XP e Windows Vista Firmware requirements The thermometer readouts supported by LogWare must have a certain firmware version installed to use the Thermometer Settings option in the Tools menu and the Download Logged Data option in the Download menu Prior versions of firmware do not fully support these features Real time logging can be per formed with any firmware version The required firmware versions are indi cated below e Model 1523 and 1524 Requires firmware version 1 0 or later e Model 1529 1529 R and 1529 T Chub E4 Requires firmware version 1 35 or later e Model 1560 Black Stack Requires firmware version 1 31 or later e Model 1575 Super Thermometer NOT SUPPORTED BY TOOLS FEATURES e Model 1575A Super Thermometer Requires firmware version 5 03n or 5 030 or later e Model 1590 Super Thermometer II Requires firmware version 2 03n or 2 030 or later e Model 1594A 1595A Requires firmware version 1 0 or later User s Guide 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 A A Installation Note Before installing Log Ware be sure to read the License Agreement and Warranty A backup should always be made of your hard disk drive and registry before in stalling any software and all running applications
289. s on the LogWare Options dialog only Thermometer readout passcodes are spe cific to the thermometer readout being used and are required to change certain settings in the thermometer readout itself To setup or change the administrator passcode 1 Select the Options option in the Tools menu 2 The LogWare Options dialog is displayed 3 Select the Admin Passcode tab 6 How to Setting up an administrator passcode Click the Change Admin Passcode button to setup or change the admin istrator passcode If a passcode has already been setup the current passcode is required and must be entered The Enter Passcode dialog is displayed Enter the current administrator passcode in the Passcode box and click OK to continue The Change Passcode dialog is displayed Enter the new administrator passcode in the New passcode box Enter the passcode again in the Con firm passcode box Click the OK button to accept the new passcode or click Cancel to abort setting the new passcode A Note DO NOT FORGET THE ADMINISTRATOR PASSCODE Write it down and keep it in a safe place Only reveal the passcode to users who are authorized to change the protected settings Once an administrator passcode has been configured certain features and set tings are disabled and can only be changed after the administrator passcode has been entered To gain access to passcode protected settings il 2 3 4 Select the Options option in the Tools menu Th
290. s on the selected axis To show tick marks check the Show check box If this check box is not checked the tick marks are not shown on the selected axis Valid settings are between 1 and 1 000 The Every option is only enabled for the X axis This option determines how often major tick marks appear on the X axis When acquiring real time data the graph displays the most recent 600 readings acquired The Every option is set to 150 meaning that a major tick mark appears every 150 readings or 600 divided by 150 4 major tick marks appear on the X axis When analyzing previously acquired data the Every option is calculated by the software de pending on the number of readings being displayed The X axis must end with a tick mark If you set an Every value that doesn t include the last value on the axis the graph will extend the X axis so that it ends on a tick mark The Minor option allows the user to determine how many minor tick marks ap pear between each major tick mark By default the X axis and Y axis are set to display 5 minor tick marks between major tick marks Valid settings are be tween 0 and 100 5 Menus Graph menu 5 5 1 3 The Through Axes Inside Axes and Outside Axes options allow the user to specify how the tick marks should be drawn on the axis By default both the X axis and Y axis are set to Through Axes The Grids options allow the user to specify whether or not to display grid lines on the graph To show the gri
291. s the current alarm settings Current Alarm Settings r Current Alarm Settings Low alarm 25 00 ES High alarm 28 00 C Figure 19 Current Alarm Settings dialog The Low alarm box indicates the current low alarm value and units If the low alarm is not enabled the Low alarm box is disabled and no value is displayed The High alarm box indicates the current high alarm value and units If the high alarm is not enabled the High alarm box is disabled and no value is displayed Click the Close button to close this dialog Output file The data that is acquired during a real time log session is written to a file called an output file This file contains information about the thermometer read out used to acquire the data alarm settings if applicable and the date time value scale and alarm state for each reading To view the contents of an output file during a real time log session select the Readings History option in the View menu or right click on the Channels grid and select the View Readings History option in the popup menu The output file is described in detail in Section 7 2 1 Output File Alarm log file During a real time log session a log of all alarm activity is recorded in a file call the alarm log This file contains alarm setting information for each channel 37 User s Guide 38 2 4 7 and the date time value scale and alarm state for each time an alarm tripped or
292. s tripped or reset an entry is written to the alarm log file This file is named alarms log and is located in the default output folder The alarm log file can also be viewed by selecting the Alarm Log option in the View menu The alarm log file is displayed in the File Viewer window Please refer to Section 7 2 3 Alarm Log File for more information on the contents of the alarm log file Please refer to Section 2 4 8 File Viewer Window for more information on using the File Viewer window 2 Real time logging Real time log session 2 4 2 2 4 3 A A A Note When viewing the alarm log file while a real time log session is running the File Viewer window displays only the information that had been written to the file at the time the file was opened Click the Refresh button on the File Viewer window to update the file The alarm log file can also be printed by clicking the Print button on the File Viewer window The output file for each channel can be opened and viewed by selecting the View Readings History option in the popup menu or be selecting the Readings History option in the View menu The output file contains all of the data that has been logged for the selected channel during the current log session The output file is displayed in the File Viewer window Please refer to Section 7 2 1 Output File for more information on the contents of the output file Please re fer to Section 2 4 8 File Viewer Window for more infor
293. se refer to the thermometer readout s User s Guide for more information on setting the system units Select the sample action from the Sample action drop down list The sample action can be set to one of the following options e Run e Stop e Sample n If the sample action is set to Run or Stop the Sample n setting is not applicable and is disabled If the filter type is set to Sample n the Sample n setting is enabled If the sample action is set to Sample n enter the number of samples in the Sam ple n box The Sample n setting can be set to any value between 1 and 32 000 The Sample timing controls allow the thermometer readout s sample timing set tings to be viewed and or modified The sample timing settings include the Sample interval Integration time and Conversion time Enter the sample interval value in the Sample interval box provided or use the up down buttons The sample interval can be set to any value between 2 and 99 999 seconds 140 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs A Note The sample interval must be greater than or equal to the integration time which in turn must be greater than or equal to the conversion time If the sample interval is set to a value that is less than the current integration time the integration time and conversion time settings are automatically set to match the sample interval setting Enter the integration time value in the Integration time box provided or use the up down butt
294. select the configuration file to open and click the Open button For more details about the alarm configuration file refer to Sec tion 7 1 2 Alarm Configuration File Once the alarm settings are complete click the OK button to save these settings and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes you have made and close this dialog 29 User s Guide 30 2 3 6 Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog Statistics Settings dialog The Statistics Settings dialog allows specific statistical functions to be enabled or disabled for the selected channel Statistics Settings Statistics Settings IV Minimum IV Average V Maximum IV Standard deviation V Spread T Sliding window Cancel Readings fi D Help Figure 15 Statistics Settings dialog To enable a statistical function for the selected channel check the box next to the appropriate function The statistical functions supported are e Minimum e Maximum e Spread e Average e Standard deviation e Sliding window If the Sliding window function is enabled a value must be entered into the Readings box All other statistical values are calculated based on the most re cent n measurements as indicated by the value in the Readings box The read ings setting can be set to any value between 10 and 1 000 If the Sliding window function is disabled the statistical values are calculated b
295. should be closed Note To successfully install Log Ware you must be logged into Windows as an Administrator Installing LogWare 1 Insert the Log Ware CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The Setup pro gram should run automatically 2 Follow the on screen instructions to install Log Ware 3 When prompted enter the product serial number The serial number is provided on a sticker typically located on the CD pouch on the inside back cover of the Log Ware User s Guide 4 After all files have been installed a program group is created with icons for the software the Help file the README TXT file and an icon to uninstall the software The installation process is complete 5 The README TXT file can be displayed by checking the appropriate check box before the setup program finishes Read this file for important information that was not available when the User Guide was printed Uninstalling Log Ware To uninstall the software use the Windows Add Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel Follow the instructions given The program files that were installed to your system are removed Any files that were created or saved by users will not be removed from the system These files along with the folders that these files are in must be manually deleted using Windows Explorer to remove them from your system Running Log Ware The following sections describe how to get LogWare up and running quickly Getting started The followin
296. solution can be set to any value between 0 and 3 or Auto Enter the minimum operating temperature for this probe in the MINOP box If the temperature measured by the thermometer readout is less than this setting the display indicates an overload condition OL Enter the maximum operating temperature for this probe in the MAXOP box If the temperature measured by the thermometer readout is greater than this set ting the display indicates an overload condition OL To exclusively lock the connected probe to this channel check the Exclusively lock probe to channel checkbox Locking a probe to a channel prevents any other probe from being used on this channel and also prevents this probe from being used on any other channel including channels of other thermometer readouts 1529 Chub E4 settings dialog The 1529 Chub E4 Settings dialog displays information about the thermometer readout including model number serial number identification information and 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs the total number of channels It also allows many thermometer readout settings to be viewed and or modified 1529 Chub E4 Settings E 1529 Chub E 4 Settings Model Serial Identification Channels f 529 jal 3053 HART 529 413053 1 3 4 Edit Filtering Sampling Measurement Channels Mise Moving average pos ma Cancel Help Figure 55 1529 Chub E4 Settings dialog The
297. splayed on the graph as if they came from the same channel single trace Optionally the statistical data for the readings may be appended to the end of the file when the output file is printed Statistics are only appended if this fea ture is enabled on the LogWare Options dialog Please refer to Section 5 6 4 Options for more details 7 Files Data files 7 2 2 7 2 3 Download file Log Ware includes a feature that allows readings that are stored in the memory of thermometer readouts that support this feature to be downloaded and written into text files called download files To download readings from the memory of a thermometer readout see the Download Logged Data option in the Download menu Download files can be opened by this software by selecting the Open Previ ously Logged Data Files option in the View menu They can also be opened in other analysis software packages such as spreadsheets and text editors The format of a download file is very similar to and follows the same general format as an output file The actual content of a download file however will vary slightly depending on the thermometer readout that the data was down loaded from See the example below downloadl txt Thermometer Model 1529 Channel 1 Date Time Reading Label 11 02 2002 10 26 28 20 3548 c DATA_04 11 02 2002 10 26 29 20 3529 C DATA_04 11 02 2002 10 26 30 20 3539 C DATA_04 11 02 2002 10 26 31 20 3536 C DATA_04 11 0
298. ssion to an out put file Output files also contain information about the thermometer readout probe and alarm settings that were configured for the log session During a real time log session the acquired readings are displayed in the Chan nels grid and graphed on the real time graph The output file can be viewed during a real time log session by selecting the Readings History option in the View menu or by right clicking on the Channels grid on the real time Log Ses sion window and selecting the View Readings History option in the popup menu After a real time log session has been stopped and or closed the output file can be opened by selecting the Open Previously Logged Data File option in the View menu All of the readings that were acquired are displayed in a spread sheet style grid and on the graph Output files can also be opened in other anal ysis software packages such as spreadsheets and text editors 229 User s Guide 230 The following is an example of an output file created by LogWare Channel 1 txt Thermometer Readout Model 1529Thermometer Serial A13053Thermometer Readout Channel 1 Channel name Channel 1 Low Alarm 79 0000 F High Alarm 80 0000 F Date Time Reading 03 29 2010 3 21 48 PM 73 8339 03 29 2010 3 21 49 PM 73 8285 03 29 2010 3 21 50 PM 73 8312 03 29 2010 3 21 51 PM 73 8254 03 29 2010 3 21 52 PM 73 8279 03 29 2010 3 21 53 PM 73 8250 03 29 2010 3 21 54 PM 73 8236 03 29 2010 3 21 55 PM 73 8237
299. t Channels Calibration Channel mode Repetitions Scanner channel Scanner sequence y i i Scanner sequence mode Seq channels User defined scanner sequence y fi 0 User defined scanner sequence Steps Scanner sequence Step channel m0 H Input 2 y Jl 2 Scanner 1 3 Scanner 2 4 Scanner 3 5 Scanner 4 hd Figure 115 1575A Super Thermometer Settings Measurement tab Use the Channel mode drop down list to select the channels to take measure ments from The channel mode can be set to one of the following options e Alternate input 1 input 2 e Input e Input 2 e Scanner channel only if Model 2575 Mighty Mux Multiplexer is con nected e Scanner sequence only if Model 2575 Mighty Mux Multiplexer is connected If the channel mode is set to Alternate input 1 input 2 Input 1 or Input 2 the scanner channel and scanner sequence mode settings are not applicable and are disabled If the channel mode is set to Scanner channel the Scanner channel setting is enabled If the channel mode is set to Scanner sequence the scanner sequence mode setting is enabled Enter the repetitions setting in the Repetitions box provided or use the up down buttons The repetitions can be set to any value between 1 and 32 000 readings If the channel mode is set to Scanner channel select the scanner channel to ac tivate using the Scanner channel drop down list 142 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs
300. t is compatible with the log session settings If there are any conflicts or if LogWare is unable to communicate with the thermometer readout appropriate messages are displayed Once the configuration file has been read in the Log Session Settings dialog is displayed If LogWare was unable to communicate with the thermometer read out or any other error occurred the log session settings may be incomplete The Open option and toolbar button are disabled while a real time log session window is open Save as The Save As option allows the current real time log session settings to be saved to a configuration file If the same basic configuration is frequently used to per form real time logging saving the log session settings to a configuration file can greatly reduce the time it takes to configure and start a real time log ses sion Before attempting to save a real time log session configuration use the Log Session Settings dialog to configure the log session The mj button on the toolbar corresponds to the Save As option When selecting the Save As option the Windows Save As dialog is dis played The Config folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for configuration files on the LogWare Options dialog Real time log session configuration files are saved with a rls extension To cancel saving a configuration file click the Cancel button Otherwise enter the filename for the configuration file and clic
301. t s logs or memory These tools are accessible by selecting options in the Download menu The following sections describe the download and log status dialogs for each of the thermometer readouts supported by LogWare Download menu The Download menu contains options for downloading logged data from the thermometer readout s memory or logs and viewing the current status of the thermometer readout s logs or memory Download Logged Data Log Status Figure 27 Download menu Download logged data The Download Logged Data option can be used to download data that has been logged to the thermometer readout s logs or memory All thermometer readouts supported by LogWare support logging of some type Please refer to Section 1 4 4 Firmware Requirements for more information When selecting the Download Logged Data option the Select Model dialog is displayed LogWare needs to know the model of the thermometer readout in or der to display appropriate options dialog Please refer to Section 3 2 Select Model Dialog for more details After the thermometer readout model and communication settings have been selected the appropriate Download Options dialog for the selected thermome ter readout is displayed The Download Options dialogs are described in more detail in Section 3 3 Download Options Dialogs Log status The Log Status option can be used to view the current status of the thermome ter readout s logs or memory This feature
302. tarted 6 graph 31 33 35 41 44 181 grid lines 185 196 H hardware 4 high alarm 27 33 37 188 history log 55 58 62 63 how to 205 import 211 index 51 integration time 141 152 internal reference resistors 145 156 interval 22 32 87 99 140 152 L label 52 labels 53 66 71 186 221 labels 70 lamp 89 latency 22 legend 186 189 lock probe 81 84 267 Index log 50 60 69 log session 22 174 log session configuration file 13 15 17 18 173 175 227 logs 47 50 51 60 62 70 177 low alarm 27 33 37 188 M maximum operating temperature 81 84 memory 47 50 55 60 62 177 198 218 221 231 memory log 57 59 menus 9 173 minimum operating temperature 81 84 model 19 48 67 72 85 97 101 105 108 112 115 119 122 127 130 137 138 148 149 moving average 86 98 N non temperature units 20 36 null modem 4 21 68 261 O offset 76 operating systems 5 orientation 195 output files 25 31 33 35 37 40 179 195 210 229 overload 81 84 overwrite 25 31 P pager software 28 paper size 195 268 passcode 73 78 81 85 90 94 104 107 110 114 118 121 124 129 133 134 136 138 146 150 157 195 198 200 201 210 215 216 polynomial 254 position 183 191 printer 195 probe 80 82 91 95 134 136 146 147 157 158 probe coefficients 219 R ratio 141 153 224 real time log session 13 rea
303. ted until downloading is complete After selecting the appropriate options on this dialog click the Download but ton to start the download process For more details on the download process please refer to Section 8 Download Process To close this dialog click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 3 Downloading logged data Download options dialogs 3 3 5 1575A Super Thermometer download options dialog The Model 1575A Super Thermometer readout can store readings in any of two logs history log and memory log Log Ware can download the readings from these logs and write the readings into download files For more informa tion on download files please refer to Section 7 2 2 Download File When the Download Logged Data option in the Download menu is selected and the 1575A Super Thermometer readout is selected on the Select Model dialog the 1575A Super Thermometer Download Options dialog is displayed 15754 Super Thermometer Download Options A 15754 Super Thermometer Download Options Select log to download History log C Memory log m Readings C Download all readings from log Download last n readings from log 10 H FT readings Resolution E H digits Files Close J Prompt to enter filename da Figure 33 1575A Super Thermometer Download Options dialog The Select log to download
304. ter the Apply button is clicked and the new settings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Sampling tab Select the Sampling tab to view and or modify sampling settings Sampling Channels Calibration Misc Units E v Figure 45 1523 1524 Settings Sampling tab Select the units to use when displaying readings in temperature using the Units drop down list Temperature readings can be displayed in either C or F This setting applies to all channels that are configured to display readings in temperature 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 1 2 Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels and to access the channel and probe settings dialogs to view and or modify channel and probe specific settings Channels tab Select the channel to view or modify from the Channels list This list indicates the channel number channel type and the serial number of the probe on each channel Sampling Channels Calibration Misc Channels 3278 Channel Settings Channel 2 48215482 Figure 46 1523 1524 Settings Channels tab C
305. that are supported by Log Ware allow readings to be logged to the memory of the thermometer readout Log Ware provides a fea ture that indicates how much of the thermometer readout s memory is already used To view the status of the thermometer readout s log s 1 Select the Log Status option in the Download menu 2 The Select Model dialog is displayed Select the thermometer readout model Also select the COM port to which the thermometer readout is connected and the baud rate to use Make sure Log Ware can communi cate with the thermometer readout by clicking the Test Communication button Click the OK button when communication is successful 3 The Log Status dialog for the selected thermometer readout is displayed indicating how much of the thermometer readout s memory is already used This dialog is specific to the selected thermometer readout 4 Click the Close button to close the Log Status dialog when finished Refer to Section 3 4 Log Status Dialogs for more information Downloading logged data from the memory of a thermometer readout The thermometer readouts that are supported by LogWare allow readings to be logged to the memory of the thermometer readout LogWare provides a feature to download the logged readings from the memory of the thermometer readout and save them to a text file or files on the computer To download readings from the memory of a thermometer readout to a text file 1 Select the Downlo
306. the Channels tab with the exception of the Query Channels button are disabled until the channel information has been queried from the thermometer readout Click the Query Channels button to allow LogWare to communicate with the thermometer readout to collect as much information regarding the current chan nel configuration as possible After querying the thermometer readout for channel information the Channels list displays one item for each channel on the thermometer readout The chan nel number module name module channel number and currently assigned channel name are displayed in the list By default all channels are enabled meaning data should be acquired from all channels The Enable All Channels and Disable All Channels buttons can be used to enable or disable acquiring data from all channels of the thermometer readout respectively To configure a channel select the channel from the Channels list The selected channel s settings are displayed in the other controls on this tab To acquire data from the selected channel make sure the Acquire data from this channel box is checked If this box is not checked all other channel con trols are disabled and data will not be acquired for this channel 24 2 Real time logging Log session settings dialog Click the Statistics Settings button to display the Statistics Settings dialog This dialog is used to specify which statistics are to be maintained and displayed for the selecte
307. tion The following toolbars are available File Toolbar D a i Figure 2 File Toolbar New Create a new real time log session configuration Open Open a real time log session configuration file Save As Save the current real time log session configuration to a configura tion file Datalog Toolbar Z gt RE Figure 3 Datalog Toolbar Setup Display the Log Session Settings dialog to configure a real time log session Start Start a real time log session Stop Stop a real time log session Close Close the real time log session window Mute All Alarms Mute unmute all audible real time log session alarms Graph Toolbar Figure 4 Graph Toolbar Graph Settings Change graph settings add trend lines alarm lines titles captions etc Zoom In Zoom in to view a section of the graph Restore Zoom Out Restore the graph to its original zoom setting 1 Introduction LogWare options 1 8 Tools Toolbar AB ma Figure 5 Tools Toolbar Synchronize Date Time Synchronize thermometer readout s date time with computer Logging Labels View change logging labels Thermometer Settings View change thermometer readout settings Help Toolbar Figure 6 Help Toolbar Help Open the Log Ware Help file Status Bar The status bar indicates the function that the software is currently performing as well as the current system date and time Note
308. to fail to accept new settings Note When starting a log session LogWare will override many of the current thermometer readout settings as needed to acquire data from the configured channels using the specified log session settings Note If the serial number and session temperature scale settings have not been configured prior to clicking the Thermometer Settings button these settings will be configured automatically after successfully viewing the thermometer readout settings dialog 21 User s Guide 2 3 2 Log Session tab After the thermometer readout and communication settings are configured the log session settings may be configured Thermometer Log Session Channels Interval between readings JV Interval between scan sequences fi seconds v j z minutes y Start log session Start logging immediately Delayed Start Reset End log session After specified time elapses bl After 24 hours X Figure 11 Log Session Settings Log Session tab Select the interval at which Log Ware should take readings on subsequent chan nels using the Interval between readings settings The range of possible settings is limited by the capabilities of the selected thermometer readout For most Hart Scientific multi channel digital thermometer readouts the minimum sam ple interval is 2 seconds A Note Due to the latency inherent in the measurement process a thermom eter readout may not be able t
309. to use to end the log session using the drop down list Choices are e By user default e After specified number of readings e After specified time elapses If the After specified number of readings or After specified time elapses option 1s selected the end log criteria must be selected Enter either the number of readings to acquire on each channel or the desired elapsed time setting The range of choices is from 1 to 1 000 000 readings 10 000 default or 1 second to 480 hours 1 hour default Note If either the After specified number of readings or After specified time elapses option is selected and the Interval between scan sequences feature is enabled the log session will stop automatically when the end log criteria is met and the current scan sequence is complete 23 User s Guide 2 3 3 Channels tab After the thermometer readout and communication settings are configured the channels to acquire data from may be configured Thermometer Log Session Channels Enable All Channels Disable All Channels Y Acquire data from this channel Channels 2 PRT 2 Channel 2 3 TC 1 Channel 3 Statistics Settings Alarm Settings 4 TC 2 Channel 4 Channel name Channel 1 Acquire data to file Trace color Channel 1 txt El Black fd M Overwrite existing V Show on graph JV Write all acquired data to the same file Figure 12 Log Session Settings Channels Tab All controls on
310. tting the current real time log session settings click the No button Otherwise click the Yes button to reset the current log session settings The Log Session Settings dialog will be displayed Please refer to Section 2 Real Time Logging for more information on configuring a real time log session Open The Open option allows a real time log session configuration file to be opened If the same basic configuration is frequently used to perform real time logging saving the log session settings to a configuration file can greatly reduce the time it takes to configure and start a real time log session The button on the toolbar corresponds to the Open menu option 13 User s Guide 14 2 1 3 A Note When opening a configuration file LogWare attempts to communi cate with the thermometer readout to verify that the settings saved in the configuration file are compatible with the current thermometer readout configuration Therefore it is necessary to have the thermometer readout connected and powered on in order to successfully open a configuration file When selecting the Open option the Windows Open dialog is displayed The Config folder should be selected by default or the folder that is specified for configuration files on the LogWare Options dialog Real time log session con figuration files should have a rls extension To cancel opening a configuration file click the Cancel button Otherwise select the configu
311. ttings Probe Probe serial numbei Edit CIC type CIC temperature Conversion Settings Conversion settings are passcode protected Figure 110 1560 Black Stack Thermocouple Channel Settings dialog After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the channel settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the channel settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog 135 User s Guide 136 Probe tab Select the Probe tab to view and or modify probe settings Probe Conversion Settings Conversion settings are passcode protected Figure 111 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Settings Probe tab The settings on the Probe tab may be passcode protected If they are a message appears at the bottom of the
312. ttings Low Range tab Select the low range to use from the Select low range to use drop down list Low range choices include Range 1 to Range 5 but may be limited depending on the thermometer readout being used Enter the low range coefficients from the Report of Calibration in the boxes provided The boxes displayed depend on the currently selected low range If a coefficient is not used set its value to 0 0 High Range tab Select the High Range tab to select the high range and enter high range coeffi 9 Conversion settings dialogs ITS 90 Settings dialog cients If the thermometer readout being used does not support ITS 90 high ranges this tab is not displayed Low Range High Range Select high range to use Range 8 273K to 692K y AJS 5 245646446E 04 B 8 6 456456456E 05 Figure 172 ITS 90 Settings High Range tab Select the high range to use from the Select high range to use drop down list High range choices include Range 6 to Range 11 but may be limited depending on the thermometer readout being used Enter the high range coefficients from the Report of Calibration in the boxes provided The boxes displayed depend on the currently selected high range If a coefficient is not used set its value to 0 0 241 User s Guide 242 9 2 IPTS 68 settings dialog The IPTS 68 Settings dialog allows the Scale RO ALPHA DELTA A4 and C4 coefficients to be entered IPTS 68 Settings
313. ttings dialog This dialog is used to configure a real time log session If a log session has already been config ured or a real time log session configuration file has already been opened this dialog displays the current log session settings 175 User s Guide 176 5 2 2 5 2 3 5 2 4 5 2 5 The pa button on the toolbar corresponds to the Setup option Please refer to Section 2 3 Log Session Settings Dialog for more details on configuring a real time log session This option is disabled while a real time log session window is open Start The Start option starts a real time log session This option is disabled until a log session has been completely configured The P button on the toolbar corresponds to the Start option Please refer to Section 2 4 Real Time Log Session for more details on a real time log session Stop The Stop option stops the current real time log session This option is only en abled when a real time log session is running A log session may be stopped at any time by selecting this option The W button on the toolbar corresponds to the Stop option When selecting the Stop option a message is displayed to confirm stopping the log session Close The Close option closes the current real time log session window This option is only enabled once the real time log session has stopped and the log session window is still open The A button on the toolbar corresponds to the Close option
314. tween 0 0001 and 10 0 mA e 100 ohm internal reference can have the sensing current set to any value between 0 0001 and 5 0 mA e 10 000 ohm internal reference can have the sensing current set to any value between 0 0001 and 0 1 mA e The external reference can have the sensing current set to any value be tween 0 0001 and 20 0 mA The sensing current is also limited by the probe s or reference resistor s maxi mum current value Use the Standby Current drop down list to select whether the standby current is enabled On or disabled Off for the selected channel Use the Calculation drop down list to determine the type of measurement cal culation that is performed for the selected channel Possible options are Ratio Resistance and Temperature The Temperature option is not available if any of the following are true e The probe assignment for the selected channel is Undefined e The probe conversion type is set to None e The probe type is set to Resistor e The reference resistor is set to Variable Resistance The Resistance option is not available if the reference resistor is set to Variable Resistance If the selected reference is an external resistor the Rs Input Settings button is enabled Click the Rs Input Settings button to display the dialog for the refer ence channel Otherwise the Rs Input Settings button is disabled 169 User s Guide 170 4 4 6 8 1594A 1595A Hart Super Thermometer Rs Settings dialog The 15
315. ul to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the module settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog Channels tab Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels on this module and to access the channel settings dialogs to view and or modify channel specific settings Channels Calibration Channels Channel Settings Figure 96 2566 TCS Module Settings Channels tab Select the channel to view and or modify from the Channels list This list indi cates the channel number with respect to this module and the serial number of the probe on each channel Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate channel settings di alog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel are read 123 User s Guide 124 4 4 3 11 2 in from the thermometer readout The Channel Settings dialog is described in detail in Section 4 4 3 15 1560 Black Stack Thermocouple Channel Settings Dialog Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify module calibration informa tion Channels Calibration alibration date ee E Inputs 1 to 6 Inputs 7 to 12 WARNING Changing these values voids the module calibration Calibration
316. umber of channels on this module It also allows many module specific set tings to be viewed and or modified 2563 Module Settings j r 2563 Module Settings Model Serial Identification Channels 2563 fat 9563 STHA 1 256341956 B General Channels Calibration Excitation current Resistance range Auto ha Auto Figure 84 2563 STHR Module Settings dialog 111 User s Guide 112 The Model box indicates the model number of this module The Serial box in dicates the serial number assigned to this module The Identification box indi cates the module name number of devices model number serial number and firmware version installed in this module The Channels box indicates the num ber of input channels on this module General module settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the General tab The Channels tab displays a list of the channels on this module and allows access to channel settings dialogs The module calibration information can be viewed and modified by selecting the Calibration tab After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new module settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dia log closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the module settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply
317. ure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 2563 STHR Module Settings Channels tab 2563 STHR Module Settings Calibration tab 2564 THRS Module Settings dialog 2564 THRS Module Settings General tab 2564 THRS Module Settings Channels tab 2564 THRS Module Settings Calibration tab 2565 PTC Module Settings dialog o a 2565 PTC Module Settings Channels tab 2565 PTC Module Settings Calibration tab 2566 TCS Module Settings dialog o 2566 TCS Module Settings Channels tab 2566 TCS Module Settings Calibration tab 2566 TCS Module Settings Inputs lto6tab 2566 TCS Module Settings Inputs 7 to 12 tab 2567 RTD Module Settings dialog 2567 RTD Module Settings General tab 2567 RTD Module Settings Channels tab 2567 RTD Module Settings Calibration tab 2568 RTDS Module Settings dialog
318. uto y Cancel aw Help Figure 72 2560 SPRT Module Settings dialog The Model box indicates the model number of this module The Serial box in dicates the serial number assigned to this module The Identification box indi cates the module name number of devices model number serial number and firmware version installed in this module The Channels box indicates the num ber of input channels on this module General module settings can be viewed and modified by selecting the General tab The Channels tab displays a list of the channels on this module and allows access to channel settings dialogs The module calibration information can be viewed and modified by selecting the Calibration tab After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new module settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dia log closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the module settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the module settings to the thermometer r
319. utomatically grows to accommodate the file with the most readings The Y axis of the graph is automatically scaled to display all traces on the graph Note The graph allows a maximum of 32 767 readings per channel If any one file contains more readings than that the first 32 767 readings are read in and the rest are ignored The graph also limits the total number of data points to 128 000 for all channels So for 10 channels a maximum of 12 800 readings per channel can be displayed To close the Previous Log Session window click the button in the title bar z Channels The Channels section is located in the upper left corner of the previous log ses sion window and displays one tab for each file that was opened Each tab is given the name of the file and the grid on the tab contains all of the data that was read in from the file Depending on the type of file being opened this data can include but is not necessarily limited to the date time value and scale of each reading as well as the alarm state at the time that reading was taken Note When opening files that contain data that was downloaded from some of the thermometers supported by LogWare no date or time informa tion is available Download files never contain alarm information Selecting a tab in the Channels section displays the data associated with that channel The color of the data in the grid matches the graph trace color as signed to this channel Right clicking o
320. utton After modifying any of the settings on this dialog click the Apply or OK but ton to write the new settings to the thermometer readout If the Apply button is clicked this dialog remains open If the OK button is clicked this dialog closes after writing the settings LogWare has a feature that causes all of the channel settings to be read back in from the thermometer readout after the Apply button is clicked and the new set tings have been written to the thermometer readout This feature can be useful to verify that the desired settings were properly applied to the thermometer readout To enable or disable this feature see Section 5 6 4 Options To close this dialog without writing the channel settings to the thermometer readout click the Cancel button Click the Help button to open the appropriate help topic for this dialog 4 Tools Thermometer settings dialogs 4 4 2 7 1 Probe tab Select the Probe tab to view and or modify probe settings Probe Calibration Probe serial number 365234 RJC type RJC temperature Extemal y 0 012 E JE Conwersion type Thermocouple Type y Conversion Settings Figure 65 1529 Chub E4 thermocouple channel settings Probe tab Enter the serial number of the probe attached to this channel in the Probe serial number box The serial number can be any combination of numbers and or let ters up to 8 characters in length The underscore _ character can also b
321. vent unauthorized users from changing them 4 passcode must be created in order to protect these settings If no passcode is entered these options will not be protected Enter the passcode in the boxes provided To continue without setting a passcode at this time simply click the OK button Notes This passcode is used only to protect LogWare settings and is independent of instrument passcodes Current passcode e New passcode rec Contirm passcode err Figure 155 Change Passcode dialog Cancel Note The administrator passcode in LogWare is completely independent of the thermometer readout passcodes The administrator passcode is used by LogWare to protect certain LogWare options and default settings on the LogWare Options dialog only Thermometer readout passcodes are spe cific to the thermometer readout being used and are required to change certain settings in the thermometer readout itself If an administrator passcode has already been setup the current passcode is re quired to gain access to the Change Passcode dialog and clicking the Change Admin Passcode button displays the Enter Passcode dialog first The current administrator passcode must be entered to enable changing the administrator passcode Enter the current administrator passcode and click the OK button to continue If the passcode entered does not match the current administrator passcode a message is displayed and access is denied
322. ver sion settings including coefficients should be passcode protected if LogWare is unable to determine the protection settings of the thermometer readout or if the thermometer readout does not support passcode protection The thermome ter readout s protection settings are always used where possible Note This option is protected by the administrator passcode To change this setting the correct administrator passcode must be entered For more information see Section 5 6 4 4 Admin Passcode Tab The Protect thermometer calibration parameters option determines whether thermometer readout calibration parameters should be passcode protected if LogWare is unable to determine the protection settings of the thermometer readout or if the thermometer readout does not support passcode protection The thermometer readout s protection settings are always used where possible Note This option is protected by the administrator passcode To change this setting the correct administrator passcode must be entered For more information see Section 5 6 4 4 Admin Passcode Tab Admin Passcode tab The Admin Passcode tab allows options pertaining to the administrator passcode to be selected General Folders Tools Admin Passcode Edit Protected Options Change Admin Passcode The Administrator passcode can be used to prevent certain settings on the LogWare Options dialog from being changed by unauthorized persons This passcode is used
323. wires drop down list The 2562 module allows the selection of either 4 wire or 3 wire This setting applies only to the four channels on the rear row of this module 109 User s Guide 110 4 4 3 7 2 4 4 3 7 3 Channels tab Select the Channels tab to view a list of channels on this module and to access the channel settings dialogs to view and or modify channel specific settings General Channels Calibration Channels Channel Settings Figure 82 2562 PRTS Module Settings Channels tab Select the channel to view and or modify from the Channels list This list indi cates the channel number with respect to this module and the serial number of the probe on each channel Click the Channel Settings button to display the appropriate Channel Settings dialog When this button is clicked the settings for the selected channel are read in from the thermometer readout The Channel Settings dialog is described in detail in Section 4 4 3 14 1560 Black Stack PRT Thermistor Channel Set tings Dialog Calibration tab Select the Calibration tab to view and or modify module calibration informa tion General Channels Calibration Calibration date Edit DA4DJ 100 ADJ 400 ADJ fi 00083 0 06388 fo 00099 WARNING Changing these values voids the module calibration Calibration parameters are passcode protected Figure 83 2562 PRTS Module Settings Calibration tab The settings on the
324. y log in the 1560 Black Stack Thermometer readout stores the values of up to the last 1 000 readings taken The history log of the 1560 Black Stack Thermometer readout will nearly always indicate 100 full It is not possible for LogWare to clear the history log Note The actual number of readings in the history log depends on the number of channels on the thermometer readout Typically the history log can hold 1 000 readings as long as there are not more than 63 total input channels on the thermometer readout For every channel over 63 the num ber of readings that the history log can hold decreases by approximately 16 To refresh the log status information on this dialog click the Refresh button The log status is read in from the thermometer readout again and the dialog is updated To close this dialog click the Close button Click the Help button to display the appropriate help topic for this dialog 63 4 Tools Tools menu 4 1 4 1 1 A Tools LogWare provides tools to synchronize the thermometer readout s clock view modify logging labels and view modify various thermometer readout set tings including filtering sampling measurement calibration module channel and probe settings These tools are accessible by selecting options in the Tools menu The following sections describe the dialogs for these tools for each of the thermometer readouts supported by Log Ware Tools menu The Tools menu contains options for
325. yed indicating that the current settings must be saved to a configuration file Click the Yes but ton to save the current settings to a configuration file 5 The Windows Save As dialog is displayed to save the current settings to a configuration file Enter the filename for this configuration file and click the OK button to save the settings to the file 208 6 How to Changing thermometer and probe settings 6 5 6 A prompt is then displayed indicating that this configuration file will be made the default configuration file Click the Yes button to set this con figuration file as the default A message is displayed indicating the cur rent configuration is now set as the default 7 Click the Close button to close the Log Session Settings dialog Test this feature to make sure it works properly by closing Log Ware and run ning it again The thermometer readout must be connected and powered on when opening a configuration file so that LogWare can verify that the informa tion in the configuration file matches the thermometer readout configuration The Log Session Settings dialog should be displayed with all of the configura tion information filled in To disable opening the configuration file on start up uncheck the Open default configuration file automatically check box on the LogWare Options dialog Please refer to Section 5 6 4 Options for more information Changing thermometer and probe settings LogWare provides a f

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

座 望 牛 - Garage  4 BR  MHP-IPDS Manual  GR-MT 10786-204001-Manual  SPA 2001 W - metabo  Making a measurement  Bedienungsanleitung  nesse link - Brod Tecnologia  Sound Programming Debugger`s User Manual  EV-98/99 franz.  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file